a-z owner's manual. contents mini countryman. mini … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle,...

223
OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI PACEMAN. Contents A-Z Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Upload: others

Post on 10-Aug-2020

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI COUNTRYMAN.MINI PACEMAN.

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 2: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version
Page 3: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

COOPERCOOPER S

JOHN COOPERWORKS

Owner's Manual for VehicleThank you for choosing a MINI.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better controlyou will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Itcontains important information on vehicle operation that willhelp you make full use of the technical features available in yourMINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your MINI.Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐chures in the onboard literature.Set off now. We wish you a lot of pleasure and enjoyment drivingyour MINI.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 4: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.US English VI/15, 07 15 500Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 5: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 212.

6 Information

AT A GLANCE12 Cockpit

CONTROLS20 Opening and closing36 Adjusting45 Transporting children safely50 Driving61 Displays69 Lamps74 Safety84 Driving stability control systems88 Driving comfort91 Climate96 Interior equipment106 Storage compartments

DRIVING TIPS112 Things to remember when driving116 Loading120 Saving fuel

ENTERTAINMENT124 Radio MINI Boost CD

COMMUNICATION138 Telephone

MOBILITY150 Refueling152 Fuel154 Wheels and tires166 Engine compartment168 Engine oil170 Coolant172 Maintenance174 Replacing components184 Breakdown assistance190 Care194 Indicator/warning lamps

REFERENCE208 Technical data212 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 6: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

InformationUsing this Owner'sManualThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Additional sources of informationA dealer’s service center will be glad to answerany questions you may have.Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: www.mini.comInformation about MINI, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: www.miniusa.com

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility ofpersonal injury and serious damage to thevehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item ofinformation."..." Identifies radio display texts used to selectindividual functions.›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voiceoperation system.››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice operation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the

relevant section of this Owner's Manual forinformation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle features and op‐tionsThe manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri‐sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMWAG.This Owner's Manual describes all models andall standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series.Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐lected optional features or the country-specificversion.This also applies to safety-related functions andsystems.For options and equipment not described inthis Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐plementary Owner's Manuals.

Status of the Owner'sManualThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con‐ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue toembody the highest quality and safety stan‐dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ fromthose in your vehicle.

Own safetyWarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured for theoperating conditions and registration require‐ments applying in the country of first deliveryalso known as homologation. If your vehicle isto be operated in a different country it might

Seite 6

Information

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 7: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐tially differing operating conditions and permitrequirements. If your vehicle does not complywith the homologation requirements in a cer‐tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐formation on warranty is available from adealer’s service center.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics,requires suitable maintenance and repair work.The manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures to aMINI dealer’s service center. If you choose touse another service facility, the manufacturer ofyour vehicle recommends use of a facility thatperforms work, e.g. maintenance and repair,according to MINI specifications with properlytrained personnel, referred to in this Owner'sManual as "another qualified service center orrepair shop".If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequentdamage and related safety risks.

Parts and accessoriesThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthe use of parts and accessory products ap‐proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.Approved parts and accessories, and advice ontheir use and installation are available from aMINI dealer's service center.MINI parts and accessories were tested by themanufacturer of the MINI for their safety andsuitability in MINI vehicles.The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐uine MINI parts and accessories.The manufacturer of your vehicle does notevaluate whether each individual product fromanother manufacturer can be used with MINIvehicles without presenting a safety hazard,even if a country-specific official approval was

issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle doesnot evaluate whether these products are suita‐ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐bile components and parts, including compo‐nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐cle, contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de‐fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐tain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing thoroughly with soap andwater.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.▷ California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty.Detailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to de‐

Seite 7

Information

7Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 8: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle isoperated under those conditions. If you wish tooperate your vehicle in another country or re‐gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements. Youshould also be aware of any applicable war‐ranty limitations or exclusions for such countryor region. In such case, please contact Cus‐tomer Relations for further information.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustain theroad safety, operational reliability and the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ures:▷ MINI Maintenance system▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian modelsIf the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in seriousdamage to the vehicle. Such damage is notcovered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐ranty.

Data memoryMany electronic components on your vehicleare equipped with data memories that tempo‐rarily or permanently store technical informa‐tion about the condition of the vehicle, eventsand faults. This technical information generallyrecords the state of a component, a module, asystem or the environment:▷ Operating mode of system components, fill

levels for instance.▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its

individual components, e.g., wheel rotationspeed/vehicle speed, deceleration, trans‐verse acceleration.

▷ Malfunctions and malfunctions in importantsystem components, e.g., lights and brakes.

▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ing the stability control system.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.This data is purely technical in nature and isused to detect and correct faults and to opti‐mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles overroutes traveled cannot be created from thisdata. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐pair services, service processes, warrantyclaims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐mation can be read out from the event andfault memories by employees of the dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,using special diagnostic tools. You can obtainfurther information there if you need it. Afteran error is corrected, the information in thefault memory is deleted or overwritten on acontinuous basis.With the vehicle in use there are situationswhere you can associate these technical datawith individuals if combined with other infor‐mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to thevehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly withthe assistance of an expert.Additional functions that are contractuallyagreed with the customer - such as vehicleemergency locating - you can transmit certainvehicle data from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDRThis vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐standing how a vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

Seite 8

Information

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 9: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under‐standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location, are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinely ac‐quired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi‐cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety AdministrationNHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of NorthAmerica, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, NewJersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or BMW of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐rcar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephonethe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You canalso obtain other information about motor ve‐hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐ety.

Seite 9

Information

9Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 10: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

WATCH ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 11: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 12: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

CockpitVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

All around the steering wheel

1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in andout  42

Power windows, front  33

MINI Countryman: power win‐dows, rear  34

MINI Countryman: safety switchfor rear power windows  35

2 Parking lights  69

Low beams  69

Automatic headlamp con‐trol  69Adaptive Light Control  71Turn signal  53

Seite 12

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 13: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

High-beams  53Headlight flasher  53Roadside parking lights  70

Computer  62

3 Tachometer  62Instrument lighting  72

Resetting the trip odometer  61

4 Washer/wiper system  54

5 Start/stop the engine and switchthe ignition on/off  50

6 Ignition lock  507 Steering wheel buttons, right

Resuming cruise control  89

Storing the speed and accelerat‐ing or slowing down  89

Activating/deactivating cruisecontrol  88

Steering wheel buttons, leftVolume

Telephone  138

Change the radio stationSelect a music trackScroll through the redial list

8 Horn, total area9 Adjust the steering wheel  4410 Releasing the hood  167

Seite 13

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

13Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 14: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Displays

1 Tachometer  62with indicator and warning lights  15

2 Display for▷ Current speed  61▷ Indicator/warning lights  15

3 Resetting the trip odometer  614 Display for

▷ Steptronic transmission position  58▷ On-board computer  62▷ Service requirements  66▷ Odometer and trip odometer  61

▷ Flat Tire Monitor  77▷ Tire Pressure Monitor  79▷ Settings and information  63▷ Personal Profile settings  21

5 Instrument lighting  726 Speedometer with indicator and warning

lights  157 Fuel gauge  628 Radio display9 Radio Radio MINI Boost CD  124

Seite 14

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 15: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Indicator/warning lightsThe principle

The indicator and warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors in displayarea 1 or 2.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning when the engine is started or theignition is switched on, and light up briefly.

What to do in case of a malfunctionA list of all indicator and warning lights, as wellas notes on possible causes of malfunctionsand on how to respond, refer to page 194

All around the center console

1 Hazard warning system2 Speedometer with

Radio MINI Boost CD  1243 CD drive

4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con‐trol  91

5 Buttons on the center console

Seite 15

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

15Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 16: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Seat heating  38

Central locking, inside  25

Front fog lamps  72

Sport button  86

Driving stability control systemsDSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol  84DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐trol  85

6 Storage compartment

All around the roofliner

1 Indicator/warning lights for the front pas‐senger airbags  76

2 Reading lights  73

Ambient lighting color  73

Glass sunroof, electrical  32

Interior lights  72

All around the shift/selector lever

1 AUX-IN port  132USB audio interface  133

Seite 16

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 17: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Seite 17

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

17Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 18: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

HANDLE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 19: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 20: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Opening and closingVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Remote control/keyButtons on the remote control

1 Opening tailgate2 Unlocking3 Locking

General informationEach remote control contains a rechargeablebattery that is automatically recharged when itis in the ignition lock while the car is beingdriven. Use each remote control at least twice ayear for longer road trips in order to maintainthe batteries' charge status.

In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, theremote control contains a replaceable battery,refer to page 30.The settings called up and implemented whenthe vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per‐sonal Profile, refer to page 21.In addition, information about service require‐ments is stored in the remote control, Servicedata in the remote control, refer to page 172.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:▷ Driver's door, refer to page 25.

New remote controlsNew remote controls are available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controlsA lost remote control can be blocked by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Seite 20

CONTROLS Opening and closing

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 21: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Personal ProfileThe conceptYou can set several of your vehicle's functionsto suit your personal needs and preferences.▷ Through Personal Profile, most of these set‐

tings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

▷ While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re‐mote control is recognized and the settingsstored with it are called up and imple‐mented.

▷ Your personal settings will be recognizedand called up again even if the vehicle hasbeen used in the meantime by someoneelse with another remote control.

▷ The individual settings are stored for nomore than three remote controls.

Personal Profile settingsThe following functions and settings can bestored in a profile.More information on the settings can be foundunder:▷ Response of the central locking system

when the car is being unlocked, refer topage 22.

▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer topage 26.

▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer topage 53.

▷ Settings for the displays in the speedometerand tachometer:▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to

page 64.▷ Date format, refer to page 64.▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,

distance covered/remaining distances,and temperature, refer to page 64.

▷ Light settings:

▷ Headlight courtesy delay feature, referto page 71.

▷ Daytime running lights, refer topage 70.

▷ Automatic climate control, refer topage 93: AUTO program, activating/deac‐tivating the cooling function, setting thetemperature, air volume, and air distribu‐tion.

▷ Entertainment:▷ Last entertainment source.▷ Radio MINI Boost CD:

Tone settings, refer to page 126.Volume, refer to page 126.

Central locking systemThe conceptThe central locking system becomes activewhen the driver's door is closed.The system simultaneously engages and re‐leases the locks on the following:▷ Doors.▷ Tailgate.▷ Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside▷ Via the remote control.▷ Via the door lock.▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door

handles on the driver's and front passengersides.

The following takes place simultaneously whenlocking/unlocking the vehicle via the remotecontrol:▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

anti-theft protection is switched on and offas well. The anti-theft protection makes itimpossible to unlock the doors using thelock buttons or door handles.

Seite 21

Opening and closing CONTROLS

21Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 22: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps, andambient lighting are switched on and off.

▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐fer to page 30.

Operating from the insideVia the switch/button for the central lockingsystem, refer to page 25.In an accident of the necessary severity, thecentral locking system unlocks automatically.The hazard warning system and interior lampscome on.

Opening and closing:from the outsideUsing the remote control

General informationWARNINGPeople or animals in the vehicle can lock

the doors from the inside and lock themselvesin. The vehicle can then not be opened fromthe outside. There is risk of injuries. Take theremote control along so that the vehicle can beopened from the outside.◀

Unlocking

Press the button. The vehicle is un‐locked.The welcome lamps and interior lamps areswitched on.You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.

Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes.

4. Press the button in the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until the symbol and "SET" aredisplayed.

5. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes.

6. Press the button in the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until the symbol shown is dis‐played, arrow.

Seite 22

CONTROLS Opening and closing

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 23: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

7. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes.

8. Press the button in the turn indicator leverrepeatedly to select the following settings:▷

Selected setting:

Pressing the button on the re‐mote control once unlocks only thedriver's door and the fuel filler flap.Pressing twice unlocks the entire vehi‐cle.

▷ Selected setting:

Pressing the button on the re‐mote control once unlocks the entirevehicle.

9. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐cator lever until the display changes. Thesetting is stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the re‐mote control.The power windows are opened. Depending onthe vehicle equipment, the glass sunroof israised.Convenient closing with the remote control isnot possible.

Locking

Press the button.WARNINGUnlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge.

If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there isrisk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock thevehicle from the outside when there are peoplein it.◀

Setting the confirmation signalsHave unlocking or locking of the vehicle con‐firmed.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button to select, arrow:▷ Confirmation signal during unlock‐

ing

Seite 23

Opening and closing CONTROLS

23Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 24: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Confirmation signal during locking

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

The hazard warning system flashes dur‐ing unlocking/locking.

▷ An acoustic signal sounds during un‐locking/locking.

▷ The hazard warning system lights upand an acoustic signal sounds duringunlocking/locking.

▷ The function is deactivated.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges. The setting is stored.

Switching on the interior lampsWhen the vehicle is locked:

Press the button.You can also use this function to locate your ve‐hicle in parking garages, etc.

Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button for approx. 1 secondand then release it.

MalfunctionsThe function of the remote control may be im‐paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un‐lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock withthe integrated key.If it should become impossible to lock the vehi‐cle with a remote control, the battery in the re‐mote control is discharged. Use this remotecontrol on an extended trip to recharge thebattery, refer to page 20.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is governedby the following:FCC ID:LX8766SLX8766ELX8CASCompliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐

ence, and▷ this device must accept any interference re‐

ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Seite 24

CONTROLS Opening and closing

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 25: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Using the door lock

Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer topage 22.

In some vehicle equipment versions, only thedriver's door can be unlocked and locked viathe door lock.

WARNINGUnlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge.If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there isrisk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock thevehicle from the outside when there are peoplein it.◀

Unlocking the doors and tailgate atonceTo lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐gate at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐ing the button for the central locking sys‐tem in the interior, refer to page 25.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐senger door, refer to page 26.

3. To lock the vehicle:▷ Lock the driver's door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or▷ Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the doorfrom the outside.

Convenient opening and closingIn vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac‐cess, the windows and the glass sunroof can beoperated via the door lock.

Opening/closingTurn the key to the unlock or lock position andhold it there.

WARNINGWith convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make surethat the area of movement of the doors is clearduring convenient closing.◀

Manual operationIf an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver'sdoor can be unlocked or locked by turning theintegrated key to the end positions of the doorlock.

Opening and closing:from the insideOperation via▷ Switch in the center console:

▷ Button in the driver's or front passengerdoor:

Seite 25

Opening and closing CONTROLS

25Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 26: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The graphic shows the button in the MINI Pace‐man as an example.The switch or the buttons can be used to lockor unlock the doors and tailgate when thedoors are closed, but they are not theft-pro‐tected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening doors▷ Using the switch or the buttons for the cen‐

tral locking system, unlock all of the doorsat once and then pull the door openerabove the armrest, or

▷ Pull the door handle on each door twice:the door is unlocked the first time andopened the second time.

Locking▷ Press the switch/button or▷ Push down the lock button of a door. To

avoid locking yourself out by accident, thedriver's door cannot be locked at the lockbutton while the door is open.

Automatic lockingIn addition, it is possible to set the situations inwhich the vehicle locks. The setting is stored forthe remote control in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

Seite 26

CONTROLS Opening and closing

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 27: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

The central locking system locks auto‐matically after some time if no door isopened.

▷ The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive away.

▷ The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if a door is notopened or after you drive away.

▷ The central locking system remains un‐locked.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges. The setting is stored.

TailgateOpeningThe tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐fore opening.

CAUTIONSharp-edged or pointed objects can hit

the rear window and heat conductors whiledriving. There is risk of property damage. Coverthe edges and ensure that pointed objects donot hit the rear window.◀

Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other‐wise, the tail lamps will be hidden from viewand driving safety will be compromised.In some market-specific versions, the tailgatecan only be unlocked using the remote controlif the vehicle was unlocked first.

Opening from the inside

Press the button on the driver's footwell.

MINI Countryman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,or

Press the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate isunlocked.

MINI Paceman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,or

Seite 27

Opening and closing CONTROLS

27Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 28: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Press the button on the remote controlfor approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate isunlocked.

ClosingWARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Makesure that the area of movement of the tailgateis clear during opening and closing.◀

Make sure that the cargo cover rests on therubber buffers of the securing straps when clos‐ing the tailgate.

MINI Countryman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgatecan be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐gate.

MINI Paceman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgatecan be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐gate.

Comfort AccessThe conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activatingthe remote control. All you need to do is tohave the remote control with you, e.g., in yourjacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de‐tects the remote control when it is nearby or inthe passenger compartment.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.▷ Starting the engine.

Functional requirements▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐

ence in the vicinity.▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle.▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐

mote control is inside the vehicle.▷ The doors and tailgate must be closed to

operate the windows.

Comparison with ordinary remotecontrolThe functions can be controlled by pressing thebuttons or via Comfort Access.Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 20.If you notice a brief delay while opening orclosing the windows or glass sunroof, the sys‐tem is checking whether a remote control is in‐side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closingprocedure, if necessary.

Seite 28

CONTROLS Opening and closing

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 29: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Unlocking

Press button 1.

Depending on the setting, either only the driv‐er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, referto page 22.Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi‐cle again.Convenient opening with the remote control,refer to page 23.

LockingPress button 1.For Convenient closing, press and hold but‐ton 1.The windows and, if applicable, the glass sun‐roof are closed in addition.

Unlocking the tailgate separatelyPress the top half of the MINI emblem.This corresponds to pressing the following but‐

ton on the remote control: .If a remote control accidentally left in the cargoarea is detected in the locked vehicle after thetailgate is closed, the tailgate opens againslightly. The hazard warning system flashes andan acoustic signal sounds.

Power windows and electrical glasssunroofWhen the engine is switched off, the windowsand the sunroof can be operated as long asneither the doors nor the tailgate are opened.

When the door and tailgate are closed againand the remote control is detected inside thevehicle, the windows and the sunroof can beoperated again.Insert the remote control into the ignition lockto be able to operate the windows and the sun‐roof while the engine is switched off and thedoors are open.

Switching on the radio ready statePress the Start/Stop button to switch on theradio ready state, refer to page 50.Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other‐wise, the engine will start.

Starting the engineThe engine can be started or the ignition canbe switched on, refer to page 50, when a re‐mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec‐essary to insert a remote control into the igni‐tion lock.

Switching off the engine in cars withSteptronic transmissionThe engine can only be switched off with theselector lever in position P, refer to page 57.To switch off the engine with the selector leverin position N, the remote control must be in‐serted in the ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with Steptronictransmission into a car wash1. Insert the remote control into the ignition

switch.2. Depress the brake pedal.3. Move the selector lever to position N.4. Switch the engine off.The vehicle can roll.

MalfunctionThe Comfort Access functions can be disturbedby local radio waves, such as by a mobilephone in the immediate vicinity of the remote

Seite 29

Opening and closing CONTROLS

29Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 30: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

control or when a mobile phone is beingcharged in the vehicle.If this occurs, open or close the vehicle usingthe buttons on the remote control or use theintegrated key in the door lock.To start the engine afterward, insert the remotecontrol into the ignition switch.

Warning lightsThe warning light in the instrumentcluster lights up when you attempt tostart the engine: the engine cannot be

started.The remote control is not in the vehicle or has amalfunction. Take the remote control with youinside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐nition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up while the engine is run‐ning: the remote control is no longer in‐

side the vehicle.After switching off the engine, the engine canonly be started again within approx. 10 sec‐onds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp lights up: replacethe remote control battery.

Replacing the batteryThe remote control for Comfort Access containsa battery that will need to be replaced fromtime to time.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Insert a new battery with the positive sidefacing upwards.

3. Press the cover closed.Take the old battery to a collection point,a dealer’s service center or another quali‐

fied service center or repair shop.

Alarm systemThe conceptThe enabled alarm system reacts to the follow‐ing:▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.▷ Movements inside the vehicle.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.Depending on the market-specific version, thealarm system briefly signals unauthorized entryattempts by:▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.

Seite 30

CONTROLS Opening and closing

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 31: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General informationWhen the vehicle is locked and unlocked, thealarm system is armed and disarmed at thesame time.

Door lock and armed alarm systemUnlocking via the door lock will trigger thealarm on some market-specific versions.To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with theremote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate with armed alarm systemThe tailgate, refer to page 24, can also beopened when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote con‐trol.When you subsequently close the tailgate, it isagain locked and monitored.Unlocking via the door lock will trigger thealarm on some market-specific versions.

Switching off the alarm▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐

trol, refer to page 22.▷ Insert the remote control all the way into

the ignition lock.▷ With Comfort Access and if you are carrying

the remote control with you, push the but‐ton on the door lock.

Display on the tachometerWhen the alarm system is being armed, all LEDspulse like a heartbeat. One LED flashes afterapprox. 16 minutes.

▷ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.▷ One LED flashes at short intervals: the

doors, hood, or tailgate is not properlyclosed.Even if these are not closed fully, the re‐maining items are locked and the LEDspulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx.16 minutes; afterwards, one LED flashes.The interior motion sensor is not activated.

▷ The LEDs go out after the vehicle is un‐locked: the vehicle has not been tamperedwith in the meantime.

▷ The LEDs flash after the vehicle is unlockeduntil the remote control is inserted in theignition, but for no longer than approx.5 minutes: the vehicle has been tamperedwith in the meantime.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote controlfor at least two seconds.To switch off the alarm: press any button on theremote control.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations such asattempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Seite 31

Opening and closing CONTROLS

31Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 32: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Interior motion sensorFor the interior motion sensor to function prop‐erly, the windows and the glass sunroof mustbe closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorcan be switched off together, such as in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer.▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

▷ Press the button on the remotecontrol twice in succession.

▷ Lock the vehicle twice with the integratedkey.

The LEDs flash in short succession for approx.2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interiormotion sensor remain switched off until the ve‐hicle is unlocked and locked again.

Glass sunroof, electricalGeneral information

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed on operating

the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Makesure that the area of movement of the glasssunroof is clear during opening and closing.◀

WARNINGUnattended children or animals can move

the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐fic, e.g. with the following actions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.

▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

Convenient operation via:▷ Door lock, refer to page 25▷ Comfort Access, refer to page 29

Tilting the glass sunroofMINI Countryman:▷ Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold.Both glass sunroofs are raised.Releasing stops the motion.

▷ With the ignition switched on, press theswitch back past the resistance point.Both closed glass sunroofs are raised fully.Pressing again stops the motion.

MINI Paceman:▷ Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold.The front glass sunroof is raised.Releasing stops the motion.

▷ With the ignition switched on, press theswitch back past the resistance point.The front glass sunroof is fully raised.Pressing again stops the motion.

Seite 32

CONTROLS Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 33: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Opening, closingMINI Countryman:▷ In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back andhold.The front glass sunroof is opened. The rearglass sunroof is closed.Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glasssunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐ward.The front glass sunroof remains in the raisedposition. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Press‐ing again closes both sunroofs completely.MINI Paceman:▷ In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back andhold.The front glass sunroof is opened.Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glasssunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐ward.The front glass sunroof remains in the raisedposition. Pressing again closes the roof com‐pletely.

Roller sunblindThe roller sunblind can be opened and closedseparately from the glass sunroof.

After a power failureAfter a power failure, it could happen that thesunroof can only be raised. In this case, havethe system initialized. The manufacturer of yourMINI recommends that this work be performedby a dealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Power windowsGeneral information

WARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐juries or risk of property damage. Make surethat the area of movement of the windows isclear during opening and closing.◀

WARNINGUnattended children or animals can move

the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐fic, e.g. with the following actions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

If, after having been opened and closed a num‐ber of times in close succession, a window canonly be closed, the system is overheated. Letthe system cool down for several minutes withthe ignition switched on or the engine running.

Opening, closing

Front windows

To open:

Seite 33

Opening and closing CONTROLS

33Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 34: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. Thewindow opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resistancepoint. The window opens automatically inthe radio ready state and higher.Press again briefly to stop the opening pro‐cedure.

To close:▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held.▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically.Pressing the switch stops the motion.

MINI Countryman: rear windows

To open:▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held.▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically inthe radio ready state and higher.

To close:▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held.▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically.Pressing the switch stops the motion.

After the ignition is switched offThe windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi‐nute after the remote control is removed or theignition is switched off.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value as awindow closes, the closing action is inter‐rupted.The window reopens slightly.

WARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐juries or risk of property damage. Make surethat the area of movement of the windows isclear during opening and closing.◀

WARNINGAccessories on the windows such as an‐

tennas can impact jam protection. There is riskof injuries. Do not install accessories in the areaof movement of the windows.◀

Closing without the pinch protectionsystem

WARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐juries or risk of property damage. Make surethat the area of movement of the windows isclear during opening and closing.◀

If there is an external danger or, for example, ifice on the windows prevents a window fromclosing normally, the window can be closedmanually.

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point andhold it there. Pinch protection is limited andthe window reopens slightly if the closingforce exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance pointagain within approx. 4 seconds and hold itthere.The window closes without pinch protec‐tion.

Seite 34

CONTROLS Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 35: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Countryman: safety switch

With the safety switch, the rear windows areprevented from being opened or closed via theswitches in the rear passenger area, such as bychildren.Press the button. The LED lights up if the safetyfunction is switched on.

WARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐juries or risk of property damage. Make surethat the area of movement of the windows isclear during opening and closing.◀

Seite 35

Opening and closing CONTROLS

35Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 36: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AdjustingVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Sitting safelyThe ideal seating position can make a vital con‐tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 38▷ Head restraints, refer to page 41.▷ Airbags, refer to page 74.

SeatsNote before adjusting

WARNINGSeat adjustments while driving can lead

to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehiclecontrol could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's sidewhen the vehicle is stationary.◀

WARNINGWith a backrest inclined too far to the

rear, the protective effect of the safety beltcannot be ensured anymore. There is a dangerof sliding under the safety belt in an accident.

There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjustthe seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust thebackrest in an as upright position as possibleand do not adjust again while driving.◀

WARNINGThere is risk of jamming when moving the

seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of propertydamage. Make sure that the area of movementof the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀

Front seat adjustment

Forward/backward

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat intothe desired position, arrows 2.After releasing the lever, move the seat forwardor back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐erly.

Seite 36

CONTROLS Adjusting

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 37: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Height

Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar‐rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar‐rows .

BackrestMINI Countryman:

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weightto the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

MINI Paceman:

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weightto the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar‐rows 2.

Lumbar supportYou can also adjust the contour of the backrestto obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐gion.The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐plementary support to help you maintain a re‐laxed, upright sitting position.

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as anexample.Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur‐vature.

MINI Countryman: rear seat adjustment

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desiredposition.Release the lever and move the seat slightlyforward or back so that it engages properly.

BackrestAdjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 102.

Seite 37

Adjusting CONTROLS

37Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 38: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Paceman: entry in the rear

1. Pull the lever on the back of the seat up‐ward, arrow 1.The backrest folds forward.

2. Push against the backrest to move the seatforward, arrow 2.

To make it easier to enter the car in the rear,push back the safety belt on the lower beltguide rail if necessary.

Restoring the original seat positionThe driver's seat has a mechanical memoryfunction for the forward/backward seat settingand the backrest setting.

1. Push the seat back to the original position.Do not fold back the backrest until the seatis in its original position; otherwise, the seatwill engage in its current position. If thishappens, adjust the forward/backward po‐sition manually, refer to page 36.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.WARNINGThere is risk of jamming when moving the

seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of propertydamage. Make sure that the area of movementof the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀

WARNINGUnexpected movements of the backrest

while driving may occur due to an unlockedbackrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There isrisk of injuries. Fold back and lock the backrestsbefore driving.◀

Seat heating

Switching onThe temperature setting progresses one stepthrough its control sequence each time youpress the button. The maximum temperature isreached when three LEDs are lit.If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature set last.The temperature is reduced, if need be, downto no heat in order to reduce the load on thebattery. The LEDs remain lit.

Switch offPress the button longer.

Safety beltsNumber of safety beltsYour vehicle has been fitted with four or fivesafety belts for the safety of you and your pas‐sengers.However, they can only offer protection whenadjusted correctly.

InformationAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving away.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.

Seite 38

CONTROLS Adjusting

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 39: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will becorrect for adult seat occupants of every build ifthe seat is correctly adjusted.

WARNINGIf the safety belt is used by more than

one person, the protective effect of the safetybelt cannot be ensured anymore. There is riskof injuries or danger to life. Do not allow morethan one person to wear a single safety belt. In‐fants and children are not allowed in an occu‐pant's lap, but must be transported and respec‐tively secured in designated child restraintsystems.◀

WARNINGThe protective effect of the safety belts

can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safetybelt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in theevent of an accident or during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or dan‐ger to life. Make sure that all occupants arewearing safety belts correctly.◀

WARNINGWith a rear backrest that is not locked,

the protective function of the middle safety beltis not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. If you are using the middle safetybelt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀

Correct use of safety belts▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to your

body as possible over your lap and should‐ers.

▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over yourlap. The belt may not press on your stom‐ach.

▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub iton sharp edges, guide it or jam it in acrosshard or fragile objects.

▷ Avoid thick clothing.▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward

around your upper body.

Buckling the beltMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage inthe belt buckle.The shoulder strap's anchorage point will becorrect for adult seat occupants of every build ifthe seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 36.

Unbuckling the belt1. Hold the belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Securing the buckle tonguesIf the front passenger seat is not occupied, slidethe buckle tongue up to the belt stop knob withthe clip.When the outer rear seats are not occupied, thebuckle tongues of the rear seats can be slid upto the cargo area trim with the clip.This helps avoid annoying noises when driving.

Seite 39

Adjusting CONTROLS

39Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 40: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Countryman: center safety belt ofrear seatThe belt buckle embossed with the word CEN‐TER is intended exclusively for use by passen‐gers riding in the center position.If the center safety belt in the rear is used, thebackrests must be locked, refer to page 103.The safety belt will not have a restraining effectif the backrest is not locked.

Belt holder in the headlinerThe holder for the safety belt is located in theheadliner.

1 Opening for the safety belt2 Holder for the small buckle tongue

Take the small buckle tongue out of the holder.Move both buckle tongues downward.

Closing

Insert the small buckle tongue 2 of the safetybelt into the small belt buckle 3.

OpeningPress the red button on the small belt buckle 3with buckle tongue 1.When the center safety belt is locked:Press the red button 3 with the buckle tongueof the outer left safety belt.

Putting on the belt

1 Large buckle tongue2 Small buckle tongue3 Small belt buckle4 Large belt buckle

Buckle tongue 1 must be inserted in beltbuckle 4. Make sure you hear the buckletongue engage in the belt buckle.Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle insuch a way that the belt lies smoothly againstthe body of the buckled person and is nottwisted.

Stowing the center safety beltIf the center seat is not occupied, insert the beltbuckles 3 and 4 into the respective holders, ar‐rows.

Seite 40

CONTROLS Adjusting

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 41: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Move the buckle tongues to the belt holder onthe headliner, refer to page 40, and insert theminto the provided holders.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seatand front passenger seat

The indicator lamps light up and a sig‐nal sounds. Check whether the safetybelt has been fastened correctly.

Damage to safety beltsIn the case of strain caused by accidents ordamage:Have the safety belts, including the safety belttensioners, replaced and have the belt anchorschecked.

WARNINGThe protective effect of the safety belts

may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐ing situations:▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or

changed in any other way.▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily

soiled.▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were

modified.Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged inthe event of an accident. There is risk of injuriesor danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Afteran accident, have the safety belts checked by a

dealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.◀

Head restraintsInformation

WARNINGA missing protective effect due to re‐

moved or not correctly adjusted head restraintscan cause injuries in the head and neck area.There is risk of injuries. Install head restraintson occupied seats prior to driving and makesure that the center of the head restraint sup‐ports the back of the head at eye level.◀

WARNINGObjects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck area.There is risk of injuries.▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

directly on the head restraint.▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐

mined to be safe for attachment to a headrestraint.

▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,while driving.◀

Correctly set head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapprox. at ear level.MINI Countryman: the center rear head re‐straint is not height adjustable.

Seite 41

Adjusting CONTROLS

41Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 42: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Height adjustment

To raise: pull.To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and pushthe head restraint down until it engages.MINI Countryman: additionally press button 2on the rear head restraints only if you wish toremove them.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

Front1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.2. MINI Countryman: tilt the backrest back

slightly.MINI Paceman: fold the backrest forward ifnecessary.

3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐straint all the way to the stop.MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐ton 2 using a suitable tool.

4. Pull out the head restraint.5. Fold back the backrest.

Rear1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐

straint all the way to the stop.MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐ton 2 using a suitable tool.

4. Pull out the head restraint completely.5. Fold back the rear seat backrest.

MirrorsExterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is morecurved than the driver's mirror.

WARNINGObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. The distance to the trafficbehind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behindby looking over your shoulder.◀

Seite 42

CONTROLS Adjusting

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 43: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Overview

1 Adjusting2 Selecting the left/right mirror3 Folding the mirror in and out

Selecting a mirrorTo change to the other mirror: slide themirror switch over.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the directionin which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manuallyIf an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,press the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding the mirror in and outPress button 3.The mirror can be folded in up to a vehiclespeed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.For example, this is advantageous▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually.

CAUTIONDepending on the vehicle width, the ve‐

hicle can be damaged in car washes. There isrisk of property damage. Before washing, foldin the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are heated automaticallywhile the engine is running or the ignition isswitched on when the external temperature isbelow a certain value.

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce the blinding effect from the rearwhen driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior rearview and exterior mirrors,automatic dimming feature

Two photocells are used for control:▷ In the mirror frame, see arrow.▷ On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation:▷ Keep the photocells clean.

Seite 43

Adjusting CONTROLS

43Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 44: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Do not cover the area between the insiderearview mirror and the windshield.

▷ Do not apply stickers to the windshield infront of the mirror.

Steering wheelAdjusting

WARNINGSteering wheel adjustments while driving

can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There isrisk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is stationary only.◀

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferredheight and angle to suit your seating posi‐tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Seite 44

CONTROLS Adjusting

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 45: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Transporting children safelyVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

The right place for chil‐drenInformation

WARNINGUnattended children or animals can move

the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐fic, e.g. with the following actions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

Children should always be in the rearWARNINGPersons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot

correctly fasten the safety belt without suitableadditional restraint systems. The protective ef‐fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost

when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. Anincorrectly fastened safety belt can cause addi‐tional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accidentor during braking and evasive maneuvers.There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Securepersons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitablerestraint systems.◀

Accident research shows that the safest placefor children is on the rear seat.Only transport children younger than 12 yearsof age (13 years of age) or shorter than 5 ft,150 cm in the rear in child restraint systemssuitable for the age, weight and size of thechild.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintsystem can no longer be used due to their age,weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seatShould it be necessary to use a child restraintfixing system on the front passenger seat,make sure that the front and side airbags onthe front passenger side are deactivated, referto page 75.

InformationWARNINGActive front-seat passenger airbags can

injure a child in a child restraint system whenthe airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐ries. Make sure that the front-seat passengerairbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀

WARNINGThe stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seatadjustment or improper installation of the childseat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the child restraint system fits

Seite 45

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

45Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 46: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

securely against the backrest. If possible, adjustthe backrest tilt for all affected backrests andcorrectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seatsand backrests are securely engaged. If possible,adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐move them.◀

Installing child re‐straint fixing systemsBefore mountingMINI Countryman: before mounting a child re‐straint fixing system on the rear seats, movethe seats into the rearmost positions.Adjust the inclination of the center backrest tothat of the respective outer backrest.After mounting the child restraint fixing systemon the respective outer rear seat, adjust thebackrest forward, if necessary, to ensure thatthe backrest is in contact with the child re‐straint fixing system. Rear seat backrests, referto page 102.

InformationPay attention to the specifications of the childrestraint system manufacturer when selecting,installing, and using child restraint systems.

WARNINGThe stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seatadjustment or improper installation of the childseat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the child restraint system fitssecurely against the backrest. If possible, adjustthe backrest tilt for all affected backrests andcorrectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seatsand backrests are securely engaged. If possible,adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐move them.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating the airbagsAfter installing a child restraint fixing system onthe front passenger seat, ensure that the front,side, and knee airbags on the front passengerside are deactivated.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint fixing system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highest po‐sition to obtain the best possible position forthe belt and to offer optimal protection in theevent of an accident.Do not change this seat position once it hasbeen set.

Child seat security

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as anexample.The rear safety belts and the safety belt for thefront passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐tension in order to permit attachment of childrestraint fixing systems.

To lock the safety belt1. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt.2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixingsystem.

The safety belt is locked.

Seite 46

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 47: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

To unlock the safety belt1. Open the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐

pletely.Center safety belt: unlock belt buckle 3 inaddition, refer to page 40.Guide the safety belt to the holder on theheadliner.

LATCH child restraint fix‐ing systemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

InformationPay attention to the operating and safety infor‐mation of the child restraint system manufac‐turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐straint fixing system.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attach theCRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined childand CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child isrestrained by the internal harnesses.

WARNINGIf the LATCH child restraint fixing systems

are not correctly engaged, the protective effectof the LATCH child restraint fixing system canbe limited. There is risk of injuries or danger tolife. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐straint fixing system fits securely against thebackrest.◀

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt outof the area for the child restraint fixing system.

MINI Countryman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors arelocated at the points indicated by the arrows.

MINI Paceman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors arelocated at the points indicated by the arrows.

The corresponding symbol shows themounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixingsystems1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐

fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐tem.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐erly connected.

Seite 47

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

47Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 48: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Child restraint fixingsystems with an upper re‐taining strapMounting points

CAUTIONThe mounting points for the upper retain‐

ing straps of child restraint systems are onlyprovided for these retaining straps. When otherobjects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐aged. There is risk of property damage. Onlymount child restraint systems to the upper re‐taining straps.◀

MINI Countryman

There are two additional mounting points forchild restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐taining strap, arrows.

MINI Paceman

There are two additional mounting points forchild restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐taining strap, arrows.

Guide of the upper LATCH retainingstrap

WARNINGIf the upper retaining strap is incorrectly

used for the child restraint system, the protec‐tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap isnot guided across sharp edges and withouttwisting to the upper retaining strap.◀

Outer seats:

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Cargo area floor4 Hook for upper retaining strap5 Mounting point6 Backrest7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐

ing system

MINI Countryman, center seat

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint

Seite 48

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 49: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point5 Cargo area floor6 Backrest7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐

ing system

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Slide the head restraint upward.2. Center seat: fold the cargo area floor for‐

ward.3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook.5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐

sition.6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.

WARNINGIf the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐

tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐ited or there is none. In particular situations,e.g. braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. Thereis risk of injuries or danger to life. Make surethat the rear backrests are locked.◀

MINI Countryman: lock‐ing doors and windowsRear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.The door can now be opened from the outsideonly.

Safety switch for power windowThis locks the rear window switches so that thewindows cannot be operated from the rear.Press the safety switch, refer to page 35.

Seite 49

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

49Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 50: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

DrivingVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Ignition lockInsert the remote control into theignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into theignition lock.

Radio ready state is switched on. Individualelectrical consumers can operate.

Steering wheel lock

Removing the remote control from theignition lockBefore removing the remote control, push it allthe way in to release the locking mechanism.The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Steptronic transmissionYou can only take out the remote control iftransmission position P is engaged: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐nition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts when the Start/Stop button ispressed and:▷ Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is de‐

pressed.▷ Steptronic transmission: the brake pedal is

depressed.

Radio ready stateIndividual electrical consumers can operate.Radio ready state is switched off automatically:▷ When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock.▷ With Comfort Access, refer to page 28, by

pressing the button on the door handle or

the button on the remote control.▷ After a certain period of time.

Ignition onAll electrical consumers can operate. Most indi‐cator and warning lights light up for differentlengths of time.

Seite 50

CONTROLS Driving

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 51: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state and ignition offAll indicator and warning lights in the displaysgo out.The ignition switches off automatically whenthe driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches the ignition backon.For example, the ignition is not switched off inthe following situations:▷ Depress the clutch or brake pedal.▷ The low beams are switched on.

Starting the engineGeneral information

DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases canenter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐haust gases can also accumulate outside of thevehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐tion.◀

WARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can put itself into

motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle againstrolling.In order to ensure that the vehicle is securedagainst rolling away, observe the following:▷ Set the parking brake.▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the

front wheels in the direction of the curb.

▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, additionallysecure the vehicle, e.g. with a wheelchock.◀

CAUTIONIn the case of repeated starting attempts

or repeated starting in quick succession, thefuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.The catalytic converter can overheat. There isrisk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐ing in quick succession.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary; start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.Do not depress the accelerator when startingthe engine.

Starting the engine

Manual transmissionRemote control in the ignition lock or withComfort Access inside the vehicle, refer topage 28.

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Depress the clutch pedal.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐tain time and is stopped as soon as the enginestarts.

Seite 51

Driving CONTROLS

51Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 52: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Steptronic transmissionRemote control in the ignition lock or, withComfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer topage 28.

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐tain time and is stopped as soon as the enginestarts.

Engine stopGeneral information

WARNINGUnattended children or animals can move

the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐fic, e.g. with the following actions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

WARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can put itself into

motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle againstrolling.In order to ensure that the vehicle is securedagainst rolling away, observe the following:▷ Set the parking brake.▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the

front wheels in the direction of the curb.

▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, additionallysecure the vehicle, e.g. with a wheelchock.◀

Before driving into a car washTo make it possible for the vehicle to roll in anautomatic car wash, follow the information onWashing in automatic car washes, refer topage 190.

Switching off the engine

Manual transmission1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.2. Shift into first gear or reverse.3. Set the parking brake firmly.4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐

tion lock.

Steptronic transmission1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐

hicle stopped.2. Press the Start/Stop button.3. Set the parking brake firmly.4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐

tion lock.

Parking brakeThe conceptThe parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; itbrakes the rear wheels.Also follow the instructions under Switching offthe engine, refer to page 52.

SettingThe lever engages automatically.

Seite 52

CONTROLS Driving

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 53: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Releasing

Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower thelever.

InformationIf for once use during driving is required, en‐gage the parking brake slightly and hold thebutton down.The brake lights do not light up when the park‐ing brake is pulled.

Turn signal, high-beams,headlight flasher

1 Turn signal2 Switching on the high-beams3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight

flasher

Turn signalPress the lever beyond the resistance point.To switch off manually, press the lever to theresistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lampindicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signalto flash.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever to the resistance point.The turn signal flashes three times.This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

Seite 53

Driving CONTROLS

53Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 54: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

Turn signal flashes once.▷

Triple turn signal.9. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Washer/wiper systemInformationDo not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,as this may damage the wiper blades or causethem to become worn more quickly.

CAUTIONIf the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the wipermotor overheat on switching on. There is risk ofproperty damage. Defrost the windshield priorto switching the wipers on.◀

Overview

1 Switching on wipers2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or

the rain sensor4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights

Switching on wipersPress the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.

Normal wiper speedPress up once.The system switches to operation in the inter‐mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speedPress up twice or press once beyond the resist‐ance point.The system switches to normal speed when thevehicle is stationary.

Switching off wipers or brief wipePress the wiper lever down, arrow 2.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Brief wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Seite 54

CONTROLS Driving

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 55: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Intermittent wipe or rain sensorIf the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, theintermittent-wipe time is a preset.If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, thetime between wipes is controlled automaticallyand depends on the intensity of the rainfall.The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

CAUTIONIf the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in car washes.There is risk of property damage. Deactivatethe rain sensor in car washes.◀

Activating intermittent wipe or rainsensorPress the button, arrow 3.

The symbol is shown in the tachometer.

Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button to select the desired sensi‐tivity.

7. Wait or hold the button until the displaychanges.The settings were stored.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rainsensorPress the button again, arrow 3.

Cleaning the windshield and headlightsPull the lever, arrow 4.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.When the vehicle lighting system is switchedon, the headlights are cleaned at regular andappropriate intervals.

Seite 55

Driving CONTROLS

55Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 56: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

WARNINGThe washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐

dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is risk of an accident. Only use thewasher systems, if the washer fluid cannotfreeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀

CAUTIONWhen the wiper water container is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is risk of property damage. Do not usethe washer system when the wash water con‐tainer is empty.◀

CAUTIONUse of the washer system with the hood

open may damage the headlamp washer sys‐tem. There is a risk of property damage. Onlyuse the washer system if the hood is fullylocked.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐tomatically while the engine is running or theignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

0 Resting position1 Switching on intermittent wipe

Turn the cap to level 1.When reverse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

2 Cleaning the rear window with intermittentwipe

Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold.3 Cleaning the rear window in the resting po‐

sitionTurn the cap to level 3 and hold.

The rear window wiper does not move if thecap is in position 1 before the ignition isswitched on.To switch on the rear window wiper:

1. Move the cap to its basic position.2. Select the required position again.

CAUTIONWhen the wiper water container is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is risk of property damage. Do not usethe washer system when the wash water con‐tainer is empty.◀

Washer fluidGeneral information

WARNINGSome antifreeze agents can contain

harmful substances and are flammable. Thereis risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the in‐structions on the containers. Keep antifreezeaway from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐erating materials out of reach of children.United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio isregulated by the U.S. EPA and many individualstates; do not exceed the allowable washerfluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow theusage instructions on the washer fluid con‐tainer.Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrateor the equivalent is recommended.◀

Seite 56

CONTROLS Driving

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 57: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

WARNINGWasher fluid may catch fire if it comes

into contact with hot engine parts. There is riskof injuries or risk of property damage. Only refillwasher fluid after the engine has cooled down.Then fully close the cap of the washer fluid res‐ervoir.◀

Washer fluid reservoir

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐voir.

The recommended minimum filling quantity is0.2 US gal/1 liter.Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac‐cording to the manufacturer instructions.Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintainthe correct mixing ratio.Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐centrate and do not fill in pure water; this coulddamage the washer system.Do not mix window washing concentrate fromdifferent manufacturers; this could cause thewasher nozzles to clog.

Manual transmission

CAUTIONWhen shifting to a lower gear, excessive

speeds can damage the engine. There is risk ofproperty damage. When shifting into 5th or 6thgear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Whenthe gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slightresistance needs to be overcome.

Steptronic transmissionIn addition to the fully automatic mode, gearscan also be shifted manually, refer topage 58, using Steptronic.

Parking the vehicleBefore exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐hicle may begin to roll.

Disengaging the remote controlTo remove the remote control from the ignitionlock, first move the selector lever to position Pand switch off the engine: interlock. Removethe remote control from the ignition lock, referto page 50.

Selector lever positionsP R N D M/S + –

Seite 57

Driving CONTROLS

57Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 58: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Displays in the tachometer

The selector lever position is displayed and theengaged gear, such as M4, is displayed inmanual mode.

Changing selector lever positions▷ To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a gear, maintain pressure on thebrake pedal until you are ready to start.

▷ With the ignition switched on or the enginerunning, the selector lever can be movedout of position P.

▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on thebrake before shifting out of P or N; other‐wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.

A lock prevents accidental shifting into selectorlever positions R and P.To override the lock, press the button on thefront of the selector lever, see arrow.

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thefront wheels are blocked.

R is ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is NeutralFor example, engage this position in a carwash. The vehicle can roll.

D DrivePosition for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ward gears are selected automatically.Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐sition D.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Press on the accelerator beyondthe resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Move the selector lever from position D towardthe left into the M/S shifting slot.

The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐played. This position is recommended for a per‐formance-oriented driving style.To deactivate the Sport program or manualmode M/S, move the selector lever to the rightinto position D.

Activating the M/S manual modeMove the selector lever from position D towardthe left into the M/S shifting slot.

Seite 58

CONTROLS Driving

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 59: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Push the selector lever forward or backward.Manual mode becomes active and the gear ischanged.The tachometer displays the engaged gear,e. g. M1.▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐

ward.▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.The vehicle only shifts up or down at suitableengine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shiftdown if the engine speed is too high. The se‐lected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Shifting gears using the shift paddleson the steering wheelThe shift paddles on the steering wheel allowyou to shift gears quickly while keeping bothhands on the steering wheel.▷ When the shift paddles on the steering

wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐matic mode, the transmission switches tomanual mode.

▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐ate or shift gears for a certain amount oftime, the transmission switches back to au‐tomatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,manual mode remains active.

▷ Pull one of the two shift paddles:The transmission shifts up.

▷ Press one of the two shift paddles:

The transmission shifts down.

The vehicle only shifts up or down at suitableengine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shiftdown if the engine speed is too high. The se‐lected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Manually unlocking the selector leverlockIf the selector lever is locked in position P al‐though the ignition is switched on, the brake isdepressed, and the button on the selector leveris pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐ridden:

1. Switch off the ignition.2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever

until the sleeve is inside out.Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec‐essary.

4. Insert the pulling hook 1 into the loop onthe passenger side.The pulling hook is found in the vehicledocument portfolio or in the pouch of thewheel change set, refer to page 181.

5. Pull the loop upward.6. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐

sition, pressing the button on the front ofthe selector lever.

Seite 59

Driving CONTROLS

59Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 60: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

WARNINGIf the transmission lock is released man‐

ually, the vehicle may begin to roll. There is riskof an accident. Before manually unlocking thetransmission lock, set the parking brake to pre‐vent the vehicle from rolling away.◀

Seite 60

CONTROLS Driving

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 61: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

DisplaysVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Odometer, external tem‐perature display, clockOverview

1 Current speed2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper‐

ature, time3 Resetting the trip odometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever toopen information in display area 2.The following information is displayed consecu‐tively:▷ Trip odometer▷ Time▷ External temperature

Trip odometer

Displaying the trip odometerPress button 3 briefly.

Resetting the trip odometer1. Press button 3 briefly.

The trip odometer is displayed.2. Press button 3 again.

The trip odometer is reset.

TimeSet the time, refer to page 65.

External temperature, externaltemperature warningIf the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signalsounds and a warning light lights up. There isthe increased danger of ice.

WARNINGEven at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃

there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. onbridges or shady sections of road. There is riskof an accident. Adjust your driving style to theweather conditions at low temperatures◀

Units of measureTo set the respective units of measure, miles orkm for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the exter‐nal temperature, refer to page 64.

Seite 61

Displays CONTROLS

61Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 62: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Tachometer

It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds inthe red warning field. In this range, the fuelsupply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperatureA warning light will come on if the coolant, andtherefore the engine, becomes too hot.Check the coolant level, refer to page 170.

Fuel gauge

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on thefuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle withthe fuel filler flap.The vehicle inclination may cause the display tovary.

Notes on refueling, refer to page 150.Filling capacities, refer to page 211.

RangeAfter the reserve range is reached:

▷ The remaining LEDs change from orange tored, arrow.

▷ The remaining range is shown on the tach‐ometer.

▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, suchas when corners are taken rapidly, enginefunctions are not ensured.

A warning light lights up below a range of ap‐prox. 30 miles/50 km.

CAUTIONWith a range of less than 30 miles/50 km

it is possible that the engine will no longer havesufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longerensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐fuel promptly.◀

ComputerOpening information in the tachometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Overview of the informationThe following information is displayed consecu‐tively by repeatedly pressing the button on theturn indicator lever:▷ Range.▷ Average fuel consumption.▷ Current fuel consumption.▷ Average speed.To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐fer to page 64.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Displays

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 63: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range availablewith the remaining fuel.It is calculated based on your driving style overthe last 18 miles/30 km.

Average fuel consumptionThis is calculated for the period during whichthe engine is running.To reset the average consumption: press thebutton on the turn indicator lever for ap‐prox. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumptionDisplays the current fuel consumption. You cancheck whether you are currently driving in anefficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle was parked andthe engine was switched off manually are notincluded in the average speed calculations.To reset the average speed: press the buttonon the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐onds.

Radio MINI Boost CD: displays on theradioSome computer functions can also be shownon the radio display, refer to page 127.

Settings and informationOperating conceptSome settings and information can only be cre‐ated or opened while the ignition is switchedon, the vehicle is standing, and the doors areclosed.

1 Button for:▷ Selecting the display.▷ Setting values.▷ Confirming the selected display or set

values.▷ Calling up computer information  62.

Symbol Function

Set the rain sensor, refer topage 55.

Open Check-Control, refer topage 67.

View service requirement dis‐play, refer to page 66.

Initialize Flat Tire Monitor, referto page 78.Resetting the Tire PressureMonitor, refer to page 80.

Set the formats and units ofmeasure, reset to the factorysettings, refer to page 64.

Seite 63

Displays CONTROLS

63Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 64: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Symbol Function

Personal Profile settings, referto page 21.

Exit the menu.

Exiting displays

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down.The current speed is displayed again.Displays are also exited if no entries are madewithin approx. 8 seconds.

Next setting or information

1. Within a setting or information display,press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down.Direct change to the next setting or piece of in‐formation.

Formats and units ofmeasureThe formats and units of measure can be set.The settings are stored for the remote controlin use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.▷ Fuel consumption: l/100 km, mpg,

km/l

Seite 64

CONTROLS Displays

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 65: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Distance: km, mi.▷ Temperature: ℃, ℉

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to change the format orthe unit of measure.

9. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.The settings are stored.

Resetting to factory settingsThe settings for formats and units of measurecan be reset to the factory settings. The settingsare stored for the remote control in use.

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

4. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

5. Press the button repeatedly until "RESET"appears on the display.

6. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges to the first setting option.The settings are reset.

ClockSetting the timeRadio MINI Boost CD: set the time, refer topage 126.

DateSetting the dateRadio MINI Boost CD: set the date, refer topage 126.

Seite 65

Displays CONTROLS

65Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 66: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date ofthe next scheduled service are displayed brieflyimmediately after you start the engine orswitch on the ignition.

A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ice requirements from your remote control.

Displaying the vehicle checkFor certain maintenance operations, you canview the distance remaining or the due date forthat operation in the tachometer.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐sponding symbol and "SERVICE-INFO" aredisplayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button to display the individualservice requirement items.

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting the information.

Symbol Function

Service requirements

Engine oil

Seite 66

CONTROLS Displays

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 67: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Symbol Function

Roadworthiness test

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

Exit the display, refer topage 64

Next setting or information, re‐fer to page 64

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control monitors vehicle functionsand alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐tems being monitored.A Check Control message consists of indicatorand warning lights in the instrument clusterand, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator and warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors in displayarea 1 or 2.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The symbol indicates that Check Controlmessages have been stored. The Check Controlmessages can be displayed later.

What to do in case of a malfunctionThe meaning of each light in the event of amalfunction and tips on how to respond areprovided in the list, refer to page 194.

Seite 67

Displays CONTROLS

67Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 68: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayedcontinuously and are not cleared until the mal‐function is eliminated. If several malfunctionsoccur at once, the messages are displayed con‐secutively.Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,they are stored and can be displayed againlater.

Viewing stored Check Control messagesThe stored Check Control messages can only bedisplayed while the driver's door is closed.

1. Press the button on the turn indicator leverrepeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap‐pear on the display.

4. Press and hold the button.If there is no Check Control message, this isindicated by "CHECK OK".If a Check Control message has beenstored, the corresponding message is dis‐played.

5. Press the button to check for other mes‐sages.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Displays

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 69: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

LampsVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Overview

0 Lamps off / daytime running lights1 Parking lights and daytime running lights2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights3 Automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light

Control, daytime running lights, and wel‐come lights

Parking lights/lowbeams, headlight con‐trolGeneral informationWhen the driver's door is opened with the igni‐tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto‐matically switched off when the light switch isin position 0, 2, or 3.Switch on the parking lights if necessary, switchposition 1.

Parking lightsSwitch position 1: the vehicle lights light up onall sides.Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐charged and it would then be impossible tostart the engine.When parking, it is preferable to switch on theone-sided roadside parking lights, refer topage 70.

Low beamsSwitch position 2: the low beams are lit whenthe ignition is switched on.

Automatic headlight controlSwitch position 3: the low beams are switchedon and off automatically depending on the am‐bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or ifthere is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control isactive.A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.The low beams remain switched on independ‐ent of the ambient lighting conditions whenyou switch on the front fog lights.

Seite 69

Lamps CONTROLS

69Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 70: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐ter the vehicle is switched off.

System limitsThe automatic headlamp control cannot serveas a substitute for your personal judgment oflighting conditions.For example, the sensors are unable to detectfog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, youshould always switch on the lights manually un‐der these conditions.

High-beams/roadside parking lights

1 Turn signal/roadside parking light2 Switching on the high-beams3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight

flasher

To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi‐nated on one side; note the country-specificregulations.The roadside parking lights drain the battery.Therefore, do not leave them on for undulylong periods of time; otherwise, the batterymight not have enough power to start the en‐gine.

Switching on the roadside parking lightTo switch on the roadside parking light on theleft or right, press the turn indicator lever up ordown after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1.

Switching off the roadside parking lightPress the lever up or down to the resistancepoint.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights light up in switchposition 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switchedon.The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐ter the vehicle is switched off.In switch position 1, the parking lights light upafter the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, driving with daytime run‐ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐time running lights cannot be deactivated inthese cases.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Lamps

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 71: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

Daytime running lights are activated.▷

Daytime running lights are deactivated.9. Hold the button down.Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Welcome lightsIf the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3after the vehicle is switched off, the parkinglights and the interior lights light up for a cer‐tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.

Headlight courtesy delay featureThe low beams stay lit for a short while afterthe ignition is switched off, if the lights areswitched off and the headlight flasher isswitched on.

Setting the duration1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

8. Press the button to select:▷

The function is deactivated.▷ ...

Select the duration, e.g. 40 seconds.9. Hold the button down.Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Adaptive Light ControlThe conceptAdaptive Light Control is a variable headlightcontrol system that enables dynamic illumina‐tion of the road surface.

Seite 71

Lamps CONTROLS

71Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 72: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐rameters, the light from the headlight followsthe course of the road.

ActivatingWith the ignition switch on, turn the light switchto position 3, refer to page 69.To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver'sside when the vehicle is at a standstill.When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Controlis not active.

MalfunctionThe warning light lights up. AdaptiveLight Control is malfunctioning or hasfailed. Have the system checked as

soon as possible.More information, refer to page 194.

Fog lightsOverview

To switch on the front fog lights: press theswitch.To switch off, press the respective switch up‐ward or downward again.

Fog lightsThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on. The green indicator lamp lights upwhen the front fog lights are switched on.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the frontfog lights are switched off when the headlightflasher or the high-beams are activated.If the automatic headlight control is activated,refer to page 69, the low beams are switchedon automatically when the front fog lights areswitched on.

Instrument lightingThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on to adjust the brightness. Thebrightness is increased to a certain limit and isthen reduced again.

▷ Press the button briefly: the brightnesschanges in stages.

▷ Press and hold the button: the brightnesschanges continuously.

Interior lightsThe interior lights, the footwell lights and thecargo area light are controlled automatically.To avoid draining the battery, all lights insidethe vehicle are switched off some time after theignition is switched off.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Lamps

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 73: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Switching interior lights on/offmanually

To switch the interior lights on/off: press theswitch.

If the interior lights are to remain switched off,press the switch for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lightsReading lights are located in the front next tothe interior light and in the rear.

Switching the reading lights on/offFront: press the switch.Rear: press the button.

Ambient lightingThe color and brightness of the ambient light‐ing can be changed.

Press the switch forward: the color changes insteps.Press the switch back: the brightness changesin steps.

Intermediate settings and intermediate colorsare possible.For continuously changing colors of the ambi‐ent lighting, press the switch forward for morethan 10 seconds.For Canadian vehicles:Continuously changing colors of the ambientlighting is not available.

Seite 73

Lamps CONTROLS

73Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 74: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

SafetyVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.

When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

AirbagsThe graphic shows the MINI Paceman as an ex‐ample.

1 Front airbags2 Knee airbag

3 Side airbag4 Head airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐quate restraint.

Side airbagsIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports theside of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbagsIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Seite 74

CONTROLS Safety

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 75: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a frontalimpact.

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-endcollisions.

Information for optimum effect of theairbags

WARNINGIf the seat position is incorrect or the de‐

ployment area of the airbags is impacted, theairbag system cannot protect as intended orcause additional injuries due to triggering.There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Followthe information on optimum protective effectof the airbag system.◀

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the danger of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐gered.

▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Keep the dashboard and window on thefront passenger side clear, i.e., do not coverwith adhesive labels or coverings, and donot attach holders or cables such as fornavigation instruments and mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sittingcorrectly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legsin the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries canoccur if the front airbag is triggered.

▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats orother items to the front passenger seat un‐

less they are specifically determined to besafe for use on the front passenger seat.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their headsaway from the side airbag and do not restagainst the head airbag; otherwise, injuriescan occur if the airbags are triggered.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, cover them or modifythem in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system.This also applies to steering wheel covers,the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillarsand the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely,injury from contact with the airbags cannot beruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ing impairment in sensitive individuals.Warning notices and information about the air‐bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the frontpassenger airbagsThe system determines whether the front pas‐senger seat is occupied by measuring the elec‐trical resistance of the human body.The front, side, and knee airbags on the frontpassenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐cordingly by the system.The indicator lamp above the interior rearviewmirror, refer to page 76, shows the currentstatus of the front passenger airbags, deacti‐vated or activated.Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc‐tions under Transporting children safely, referto page 45.

Seite 75

Safety CONTROLS

75Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 76: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

WARNINGThe ensure the front-seat passenger air‐

bag function, it must be detected, whether aperson occupies the front passenger seat. Theentire seat cushion area must be used for thispurpose. There is risk of injuries or danger tolife. Make sure that the front passenger keepshis or her feet in the floor area.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults,the front passenger airbags may be deactivatedin certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐cator lamp for the front passenger airbagslights up.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front passenger airbags are activated andthe indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐ion can be detected correctly:▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or

other items to the front passenger seat un‐less they are specifically determined to besafe for use on the front passenger seat.

▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐senger seat if a child restraint fixing systemis mounted on the seat.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

Indicator light for the front passengerairbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags indicates the operating state of the frontpassenger airbags.The light indicates whether the airbags are acti‐vated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child who is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system intended for thatpurpose is detected on theseat or the seat is empty. Theairbags on the front passen‐ger side are not activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,for example, a correctly seated person ofsufficient size is detected on the seat. Theairbags on the front passenger side are ac‐tivated.

Most child seats are detected by the system.Especially the child seats required by NHTSA atthe time that the vehicle was manufactured.After installing a child seat, make sure that theindicator lamp for the front passenger airbagslights up. This indicates that the child seat hasbeen detected and the front passenger airbagsare not activated.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Safety

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 77: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Operational readiness of airbag system

InformationWARNINGIndividual components can be hot after

triggering of the airbag system. There is risk ofinjuries. Do not touch individual components.◀

WARNINGImproperly executed work can lead to

failure, malfunction or unintentional triggeringof the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐tended in the event of an accident despite re‐spective accident severity. There is risk ofinjuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ped by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.◀

Correct function

In the radio ready state and beyond, re‐fer to page 50, the warning light lightsup briefly to indicate that the entire air‐

bag system and the belt tensioners are opera‐tional.

Airbag system malfunction▷ Warning light does not light up in the radio

ready state.▷ Warning light remains permanently on.The airbag restraint system and belt tensionerare not working. Have the vehicle checked im‐

mediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe conceptThe system does not measure the actual infla‐tion pressure in the tires.The system detects a pressure loss in a tire bycomparing the rotational speeds of the individ‐ual wheels while moving.In the event of a pressure loss, the diameterand therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐sponding wheel change. This is detected andreported as a flat tire.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized whenthe tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐sured.Initialize the system after each correction of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.

System limitsA natural, even pressure loss in all four tirescannot be detected. Therefore, check the tireinflation pressure regularly.Sudden serious tire damage caused by externalinfluences cannot be indicated in advance.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Seite 77

Safety CONTROLS

77Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 78: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

InitializationThe initialization process adopts the set infla‐tion tire pressures as reference values for thedetection of a flat tire. Initialization is started byconfirming the inflation pressures.Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains.

1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐sponding symbol and "RESET" are dis‐played.

5. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

6. Drive away.Initialization is completed while the car istraveling without feedback being given.

Indication of a flat tireThe warning lights come on in yellowand red. In addition, a signal sounds.There is a flat tire or a major loss in tireinflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 162, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

WARNINGA damaged regular tire with low or miss‐

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,such as steering and braking response. Run-flattires can maintain limited stability. There is riskof an accident. Do not continue driving if thevehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Fol‐low the information on run-flat tires and con‐tinued driving with these tires.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the inflation pressure inall four tires.The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 162, can be used for thispurpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.If identification of flat tire damage is notpossible, please contact a dealer’s service

Seite 78

CONTROLS Safety

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 79: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

center or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 162.

Run-flat tiresYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation

pressure in all four tires.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Flat Tire Monitor may not havebeen initialized. In this case, initialize thesystem.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is ap‐prox. 50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance dependson how the vehicle is used during the trip, theactual distance may be smaller or greater de‐pending on the driving speed, road conditions,external temperature, cargo load, etc.

WARNINGYour vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missingtire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability isreduced when braking, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange. There is risk of an accident.Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐cate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed andstop, otherwise, pieces of the tire could comeloose and cause an accident. Do not continuedriving. Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure MonitorTPMThe conceptThe system monitors the tire pressure in thefour mounted tires. The system notifies you ifthere is a significant loss of pressure in one ormore tires. Sensors in the tire valves measurethe tire pressure.

InformationTo operate the system, also note the additionalinformation and instructions contained underTire inflation pressure, refer to page 154.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been reset while the in‐flation pressure was correct; otherwise, it maynot reliably signal a loss in pressure.Perform a system reset after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to a new value and afterchanging a tire or wheelAlways use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐sure that the system will operate properly.

Seite 79

Safety CONTROLS

79Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 80: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Performing a resetPerform a system reset after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to a new value and afterchanging a tire or wheel.

1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the displaychanges.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐bol for the Tire Pressure Monitor and "AC‐TIVE" are displayed. The Tire Pressure Mon‐itor can be reset with "RESET".

5. Press and hold the button until "RESET‐TING" is displayed.

6. Drive away.After a short trip at over 20 mph/30 km/h,the set tire inflation pressures are adoptedas target values. The reset is completed au‐tomatically as you drive.The trip can be interrupted at any time.When driving resumes, the reset is contin‐ued automatically.

Low tire pressure messageThe warning lights come on in yellowand red. A Check Control message isdisplayed. In addition, a signal sounds.

▷ There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla‐tion pressure on the indicated wheel.

▷ The system was not reset after a wheelchange and thus issues warnings based onthe inflation pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 162, are la‐beled on the tire sidewall with a circularsymbol containing the letters RSC.

WARNINGA damaged regular tire with low or miss‐

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,such as steering and braking response. Run-flattires can maintain limited stability. There is risk

Seite 80

CONTROLS Safety

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 81: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

of an accident. Do not continue driving if thevehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Fol‐low the information on run-flat tires and con‐tinued driving with these tires.◀

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires. The tire pressure gauge of theMobility System, refer to page 162, can beused for this purpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Tire Pressure Monitor may nothave been reset. Reset the system.If identification of flat tire damage is notpossible, please contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 162.Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐ics. In this case, have the electronicschecked at the next opportunity and havethem replaced if necessary.

Run-flat tiresYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

WARNINGA damaged regular tire with low or miss‐

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,such as steering and braking response. Run-flattires can maintain limited stability. There is riskof an accident. Do not continue driving if thevehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Fol‐low the information on run-flat tires and con‐tinued driving with these tires.◀

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires iscorrect, the Tire Pressure Monitor may nothave been reset. Reset the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is ap‐prox. 50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance dependson how the vehicle is used during the trip, theactual distance may be smaller or greater de‐pending on the driving speed, road conditions,external temperature, cargo load, etc.

WARNINGYour vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missingtire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability isreduced when braking, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange. There is risk of an accident.Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.◀

Seite 81

Safety CONTROLS

81Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 82: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐cate the final failure of the tire.Reduce your speed and stop. Parts of tires canpeel away, which could cause an accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Message indicating that the inflationpressure needs to be checked

The yellow warning light lights up.A Check Control message is displayed.

▷ The system has detected that a wheel waschanged but a reset was not performed.

▷ The tire was not inflated according to speci‐fications.

▷ The tire pressure has dropped since the lastconfirmation.

In this case:▷ Check the tire inflation pressure and correct

it if necessary.▷ After changing a wheel, reset the system.

System limitsThe system will not function properly if a resetwas not performed, e.g., it may identify a tire asflat although the tire is filled to the correct infla‐tion pressure.The tire pressure depends on the temperatureof the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increasesthe tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure de‐creases when the tire temperature drops. Incase of severe temperature drops, this behaviormay lead to a warning on account of the de‐fined warning limits.The system cannot indicate sudden serious tiredamage caused by external circumstances.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning light flashes yellowand then lights up continuously.A Check Control message is displayed.

A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannotbe detected.Examples and recommendations in the follow‐ing situations:▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted.Have it checked by a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop as needed.

▷ Malfunction:Have system checked by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

The yellow warning light flashes andthen lights up continuously.A Check Control message is displayed.

A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannotbe detected.Display in the following situation:▷ Disturbance by other systems or devices

with the same radio frequency:After leaving the area of the disturbance,the system automatically becomes activeagain.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS138 Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemsEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).

Seite 82

CONTROLS Safety

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 83: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detectsa malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐mately one minute and then remain continu‐ously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle startups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐placement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐placement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

Seite 83

Safety CONTROLS

83Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 84: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Driving stability control systemsVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Antilock Brake SystemABSABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.Steerability is maintained even during full brak‐ing. This increases active driving safety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBVThe system controls the brake pressure in therear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

CBC Cornering Brake ControlWhen braking in curves or during a lanechange, driving stability and steering responseare improved further.

Brake assistantWhen the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys‐tem automatically produces the maximumbraking force boost. In this way, the systemhelps keep the braking distance as short as

possible. This system utilizes all of the benefitsprovided by ABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of full braking.

Dynamic Stability Con‐trol DSCThe conceptDSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheelswhen driving away and accelerating.DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subjectto physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicleon a steady course by reducing engine speedand by applying brakes to the individualwheels.Adapt your driving style to the situation, for anappropriate driving style is always the responsi‐bility of the driver.DSC is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

WARNINGWhen driving with roof load, e.g. with

roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety maynot be ensured in driving-critical situations dueto the elevated center of gravity. There is risk ofaccidents or risk of property damage. Do notdeactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC whendriving with roof load.◀

Seite 84

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 85: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Deactivating DSC

Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicatorlamp lights up in the speedometer and DSC OFFappears in the tachometer. DSC is deactivated.Intervening measures to stabilize the vehicleand give it forward momentum are no longerexecuted.

When driving with snow chains or to rock thevehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti‐vate DSC temporarily.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC againas soon as possible.

Activating DSCPress the switch again; the DSC indicator lampsin the display elements go out.

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator lamp in the tachometerflashes: DSC is controlling the driveforces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC hasfailed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometerlights up and DSC OFF appears in thetachometer.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Con‐trol DTCThe conceptThe DTC system is a version of the DSC in whichforward momentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum forward mo‐mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ited.It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTCunder the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in

slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered roadsurfaces.

▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting offin deep snow, sand, or on loose ground.

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Seite 85

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

85Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 86: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Activating DTC

Press the switch; the DSC OFF indicator lamplights up in the speedometer and TRACTIONappears in the tachometer. Dynamic StabilityControl DSC is deactivated, Dynamic TractionControl DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTCPress the switch again; the DSC OFF indicatorlamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in thetachometer go out.In the interest of better forward momentum,brake intervention is performed in the mannerof a differential lock when the drive wheels spinunevenly even when DSC/DTC is deactivated.

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator lamp in the tachometerflashes: DTC is controlling the driveforces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC hasfailed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometerlights up and TRACTION appears in thetachometer.

DTC is activated.

Hill drive-off assistantThis system supports driving away on gradients.The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the footbrake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive awaywithout delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle isheld in place for approx. 2 seconds.

ALL4 all-wheel systemALL4 is the all-wheel system of your MINI. Thecombined effects of ALL4 and DSC further opti‐mize the traction and dynamic driving charac‐teristics. The ALL4 all-wheel system variablydistributes the drive forces to the front and rearaxles depending on the driving situation andprevailing road conditions.

Sport buttonWhen this button is pressed, the vehicle re‐sponds in an even sportier manner.▷ The engine responds more spontaneously

to accelerator movements.▷ The steering responds more directly.▷ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine

sounds sportier when coasting.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 87: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ For Steptronic transmissions: more rapidgear changes in the Sport program.

Activating the system

Press the switch; the LED in the button lights upand SPORT is displayed briefly in the tachome‐ter.

Deactivating the system▷ Press the switch again.▷ Switch the engine off.

Seite 87

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

87Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 88: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Driving comfortVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system is functional at speeds beginning atapprox. 20 mph/30 km/h.The vehicle stores and maintains the speedspecified using the controls on the steeringwheel.

WARNINGThe use of the system can lead to an in‐

creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐tions:▷ On winding roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.There is risk of accidents or risk of propertydamage. Only use the system if driving at con‐stant speed is possible.◀

Controls

Overview

1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing thespeed

2 Activating/deactivating cruise control3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the

speed4 Resuming cruise control

Switching onPress button 2.

The indicator lamp lights up in thespeedometer. Cruise control is ready tooperate and can be activated.

Switch offWARNINGThe system does not relieve from the per‐

sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust thedriving style to the traffic conditions. Watchtraffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐spective situations.◀

Press button 2.▷ When activated: press twice.▷ When interrupted: press once.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Driving comfort

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 89: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The displays go out. The stored target speed iscleared.

InterruptingPress button 2.The system is interrupted automatically if▷ The brakes are applied.▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.▷ DSC intervenes.

Maintaining, storing the current speedWARNINGThe desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐

justed or called up by mistake. There is risk ofan accident. Adjust the desired speed to thetraffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐tively interfere in the respective situations.◀

Press button 1 or button 3.The current speed is maintained and stored. Itis displayed briefly in the tachometer.On downhill gradients, it may prove impossibleto maintain the set speed if the engine brakingpower is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it mayprove impossible to maintain the set speed ifthe engine power output is insufficient.

Increasing speed▷ Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired

speed is reached.Each time the button is pressed, the speedincreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Press and hold button 1 until the desiredspeed is reached.The vehicle accelerates without pressure onthe accelerator pedal. After the button isreleased, the achieved speed is maintainedand stored.

Decreasing speedPress button 3 repeatedly or hold it until thedesired speed is reached.The functions are the same those when thespeed is increased, only that the speed is re‐duced.

Resuming a speed stored beforehandPress button 4.The last stored speed is resumed and main‐tained.The stored speed is cleared when the ignition isswitched off.

Display in the tachometer

The selected speed is displayed briefly.

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appearsbriefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐erate the system.

For better controlThe indicator lamp lights up in thespeedometer. Cruise control is ready tooperate and can be activated.

MalfunctionThe warning lamp in the tachometerlights up.The system is malfunctioning or has

failed.

Seite 89

Driving comfort CONTROLS

89Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 90: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Park Distance ControlPDCThe conceptPDC provides support when parking in reverse.Signal tones indicate that the vehicle is ap‐proaching an object behind it. Measurementsare made by four ultrasound sensors in thebumpers.The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given:▷ By the two corner sensors at ap‐

prox. 24 in/60 cm.▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.WARNINGDue to high speeds when PDC is acti‐

vated, the warning can be delayed due to phys‐ical circumstances. There is risk of injuries orrisk of property damage. Avoid approaching anobject quickly. Avoid driving away quickly whilePDC is not yet active.◀

Automatic operationThe system is activated after approx. one sec‐ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi‐tion R is engaged while the engine is running orthe ignition is switched on. Await this short pe‐riod before setting the vehicle into motion.

Signal tonesThe closer the vehicle is to the object, theshorter the intervals become. If the distance toa detected object is less than approx.12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.If the distance remains constant, for examplewhen driving parallel to a wall, the signal toneis stopped after approx. 3 seconds.

VolumeThe signal tone volume can be adjusted.Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 126.

System limitsWARNINGThe system does not relieve from the per‐

sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjustthe driving style to the traffic conditions. Watchtraffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐tively interfere in the respective situations.◀

MalfunctionThe warning light lights up. PDC is mal‐functioning or has failed. Have the sys‐tem checked.

To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keepthe sensors clean and free of ice. When usinghigh-pressure washers, do not spray the sen‐sors for long periods and maintain a distance ofat least 12 in/30 cm.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Driving comfort

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 91: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

ClimateVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Air conditioner

1 Air volume2 Cooling function3 Recirculated air mode4 Temperature

5 Rear window defroster6 Vent settings7 Windshield heating

Air volumeVary the air volume. The higherthe rate, the more effective theheating or cooling will be.

The air flow rate may be reduced or the blowermay be switched off entirely to save on batterypower.

Seite 91

Climate CONTROLS

91Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 92: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Switching the system on/offTurn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0.The blower and air conditioner are completelyswitched off and the air supply is cut off.Set any air volume to switch on the air condi‐tioning.

Cooling functionThe car's interior can only becooled with the engine running.The cooling function cools anddehumidifies the incoming airbefore reheating it as required,

according to the temperature setting.The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.To cool the air faster and more intensivelywhen external temperatures are high, switchon the recirculated air mode.

Recirculated air modeIf the air outside the car has anunpleasant odor or contains pol‐lutants, shut off the supply to theinterior of the car temporarily.The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or switch offthe recirculated-air mode and increase the airvolume if necessary. Make sure that air canflow to the windshield.Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐vated at low external temperatures.With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates and thefogging of the windows increases.

TemperatureTurn upward, red, to raise thetemperature.Turn downward, blue, to lowerthe temperature.

Rear window defrosterThe rear window defrosterswitches off automatically after acertain period of time.The rear window defrosterpower may be lowered or even

switched off entirely to save on battery power.

Vent settingsDirect the flow of air to the win‐dows , to the upper bodyarea , or to the footwell .Intermediate positions are possi‐ble.

Windshield heatingThe windshield heating switchesoff automatically after sometime.The windshield heating may bereduced or even switched off en‐

tirely to save on battery power.

Defrosting and defogging windows1. Set the maximum air volume.2. Air distribution in position .

By switching on the cooling function, thewindows are defogged more rapidly.

3. Set the highest temperature, red.4. Deactivate recirculated air mode.5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces‐

sary.6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec‐

essary.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Climate

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 93: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MicrofilterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi‐crofilter should be changed during mainte‐nance of your vehicle.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐

tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from theoutside air. The combined filter should bechanged during maintenance of your vehicle.

Automatic climate control

1 Air flow, manual2 AUTO program3 Recirculated air mode4 Maximum cooling5 Manual air distribution6 Temperature

7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐sation

8 Cooling function9 Rear window defroster10 Windshield heating

Comfortable interior climateThe AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select acomfortable interior temperature only.

The following sections contain more detailedinformation on the available setting options.Most of these settings are stored for the remotecontrol in use, Personal Profile settings, refer topage 21.

Seite 93

Climate CONTROLS

93Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 94: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Air flow, manualPress the – button to reduce theair volume. Press the + button toincrease the air volume.The automatic mode for the airvolume can be switched on

again using the AUTO button.

The air flow rate may be reduced or the blowermay be switched off entirely to save on batterypower. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/offReduce the air volume by pressing the – buttonuntil the system is switched off. All displays goout.Press the AUTO button to switch the automaticclimate control back on.

AUTO programThe AUTO program automati‐cally adjusts the air distributionto the windshield and side win‐dows, toward the upper bodyarea, and into the footwell. The

air volume and your specifications for the tem‐perature are adjusted to outside influences dueto the seasons, e. g., solar radiation.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.The program is switched off if the air distribu‐tion is manually adjusted or the button ispressed again.

Recirculated air modeIf the air outside the car has anunpleasant odor or contains pol‐lutants, shut off the supply to theinterior of the car temporarily.The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off

the recirculated-air mode and increase the airvolume if necessary. Make sure that air canflow to the windshield.Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐vated at low external temperatures.With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates and thefogging of the windows increases.

Maximum coolingAutomatic climate controlswitches to the lowest tempera‐ture, a high air volume, and re‐circulated air mode.For maximum cooling, open the

vents for the upper body area.

The air is cooled as quickly as possible:▷ At an external temperature above

32 ℉/0 ℃.▷ When the engine is running.

Manual air distributionThe flow of air is directed, as se‐lected, to the windows, to theupper body area, or to the foot‐well.The automatic mode for the air

distribution can be switched back on using theAUTO button.

TemperatureSet the desired temperature in‐dividually.The automatic climate controlachieves this temperature asquickly as possible regardless of

the season, using maximum cooling or heatingpower if necessary, and then maintains it.

When switching between different temperaturesettings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐

Seite 94

CONTROLS Climate

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 95: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

mate control does not have sufficient time toadjust the set temperature.

Rear window defrosterThe rear window defrosterswitches off automatically after acertain period of time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, upperwires are used as an antenna and are not partof the rear window defroster.

Defrosting and defogging windowsQuickly removes ice and con‐densation from the windshieldand front side windows. For thispurpose, also switch on the cool‐ing function.

The windshield heating switches on automati‐cally.

Windshield heatingThe windshield heating switchesoff automatically after sometime.

Cooling functionThe cooling function cools anddehumidifies the incoming airbefore reheating it as required,according to the temperaturesetting. The car's interior can

only be cooled with the engine running.

The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir‐culated air mode is switched on automatically ifnecessary.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally when the AUTO button is pressed.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from theoutside air. The combined filter should bechanged during maintenance of your vehicle.

Ventilation

1 Knob for continuous opening and closing2 Nozzle for direction of air flow

Opening/closingTurn the knob.

Direction of air flowPivot the entire nozzle.

Seite 95

Climate CONTROLS

95Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 96: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Interior equipmentVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Universal garage dooropenerThe conceptThe universal garage door opener can be usedto operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐led systems, such as garage door drives orlighting systems. The universal garage dooropener replaces up to 3 different hand-heldtransmitters. To operate it, the buttons on theinterior rearview mirror must be programmedfor the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐gramming procedure.

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garagedoor, using the universal garage door opener.There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐age. Make sure that the area of movement ofthe respective system is clear during program‐ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for security reasons.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag‐ing or in the operating instructions ofthe system being operated, the system

is generally compatible with the universal ga‐rage door opener.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐

fied service center or repair shop.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of theGentex Corporation.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED2 Buttons3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐

gramming.

Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All

Seite 96

CONTROLS Interior equipment

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 97: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

programmed settings of the buttons on theinterior rearview mirror are deleted.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttonson the interior rearview mirror. The re‐quired distance depends on the particularhand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button of the desired function onthe hand-held transmitter and the buttonbeing programmed on the interior rearviewmirror simultaneously and hold. The LED onthe interior rearview mirror flashes slowly atfirst.

5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, releaseboth buttons. Rapid flashing indicates thatthe button on the interior rearview mirrorhas been programmed.If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐onds, change the distance between the in‐terior rearview mirror and the hand-heldtransmitter and repeat the step. Multipletrials at different distances may be neces‐sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between tri‐als.

6. To program additional functions on otherbuttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttonson the interior rearview mirror.

Special characteristics of alternating-code radio systemsIf the system cannot be operated after re‐peated programming, check whether the sys‐tem to be operated uses an alternating-codesystem.Read the operating instructions of the systemor press and hold the programmed button onthe interior rearview mirror. If the LED on theinterior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at firstand then lights up continuously for 2 seconds,the system is equipped with an alternating-code system. This flashing LED pattern repeatsitself for approx. 20 seconds.

In systems with an alternating-code system, theuniversal garage door opener and the systemmust be additionally synchronized.Please obtain additional information on syn‐chronization in the operating instructions of thesystem being set up.The systems will be easier to synchronize withthe aid of a second person.Synchronization:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐mote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on theinterior rearview mirror as described.

3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐ton on the system being set up. You haveapprox. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the button on the interiorrearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds andthen release it. Repeat this step up to threetimes if necessary to complete the synchro‐nization procedure. When synchronizationis completed, the programmed function isexecuted.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐

tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm fromthe memory buttons.The required distance depends on the par‐ticular hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the memory button of the universalgarage door opener.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.20 seconds, press the transmit button onthe hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashesrapidly.If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐prox. 60 seconds, change the distance andrepeat the step.

Seite 97

Interior equipment CONTROLS

97Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 98: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐ter approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐tance and repeat the step. If programmingwas aborted by the hand-held transmitter,hold down the memory button and pressand release the button on the hand-heldtransmitter several times for 2 seconds.

ControlsWARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garagedoor, using the universal garage door opener.There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐age. Make sure that the area of movement ofthe respective system is clear during program‐ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interior rear‐view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐tion switched on. When you are within the re‐ception range of the system, press and hold thebutton until the function is initiated. The LED onthe interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐ously while the radio signal is being transmit‐ted.

Deleting stored functionsPress the right and left buttons on the interiorrearview mirror simultaneously for approx.20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. Allstored functions are deleted. The functions can‐not be deleted individually.

Sun visorGlare protection

Folding downFold the sun visor down.

Folding upFold the sun visor up.

Glare protection from the side

Folding down1. Fold the sun visor down.2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways

to the side window.

Folding upTo close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located behind a cover oneach sun visor.To open, fold the cover up.Depending on the vehicle equipment, mirrorlighting comes on when the cover is opened.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button on the back of the mir‐ror

2 Display

The display shows the main or secondary com‐pass direction in which the vehicle is traveling.

Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by pressingthe adjustment button with a pointed objectsuch as a pen. The following adjustment op‐tions are displayed one after the other, de‐

Seite 98

CONTROLS Interior equipment

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 99: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

pending on how long the adjustment button ispressed:▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand

steering.

▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.

Setting compass zonesSet the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐hicle's geographic location so that the compasscan function correctly; refer to the world mapwith compass zones.

Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.The number of the compass zone set is shownin the display.To change the zone setting, briefly press theadjustment button repeatedly until the displayshows the number of the compass zone corre‐sponding to the current location.The compass is operational again after approx.10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated in thefollowing situations:▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.

▷ The cardinal direction displayed does notchange even if the direction of travelchanges.

▷ Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐

jects or overhead power lines in the vicinityof the vehicle and that there is enoughspace to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐

onds to call up C. Then drive at least one fullcircle at a maximum speed of4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐brated, the C is replaced by the compass di‐rections.

Seite 99

Interior equipment CONTROLS

99Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 100: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Right-hand/left-hand steeringThe digital compass is set for right-hand or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.Briefly press the adjustment button again toswitch between English "E" and German "O".The setting is automatically saved after approx.10 seconds.

Cupholders and ashtray/lighter

CupholdersTwo cupholders are located in the center con‐sole in the front.MINI Countryman: two additional cupholdersare located at the end of the center console inthe rear. Additional cupholders can be installedon the center rail.

MINI Paceman: additional cupholders are lo‐cated in the console between the rear seats.

Depending on the equipment, additional cu‐pholders can be installed on the center rail.

WARNINGUnsuitable containers in the cup holder

and hot beverages can damage the cup holderand increase the risk of injuries in the event ofan accident. There is risk of injuries or risk ofproperty damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐ble, and sealable containers. Do not transporthot beverages. Do not force objects into thecup holder.◀

AshtrayThe ashtray is located in one of the cupholdersin the center console at the front.

EmptyingTake out the entire ashtray, arrow.When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in‐serted in the cupholder with the adapter.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignitionswitched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Interior equipment

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 101: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The lighter can be removed as soon as it popsback out.

WARNINGContact with hot heating elements or the

hot socket of the cigarette lighter can causeburns. Flammable materials can ignite if thecigarette lighter falls down or is held againstthe respective objects. There is risk of fire andinjuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.by carrying the remote control along when ex‐iting the vehicle.◀

Connecting electrical de‐vicesThe lighter socket can be used as a socket forelectrical equipment while the engine is run‐ning or when the ignition is switched on. Thetotal load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volt.Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting toinsert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

CAUTIONBattery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12V on-board networkcan be overloaded or damaged. There is risk ofproperty damage. Only connect battery charg‐ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aidterminals in the engine compartment.◀

CAUTIONIf metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter orsocket cover again after using the socket.◀

Socket in the center consoleRemove the cover or lighter, refer to page 100,from the socket.

Socket in the rear

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Socket in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

Seite 101

Interior equipment CONTROLS

101Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 102: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Cargo areaCargo cover

WARNINGLoose objects in the car's interior can be

thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.in the event of an accident or during brakingand evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover israised.When closing, ensure that the cargo cover isresting on the rubber buffers of the securingstraps; otherwise, damage may occur whenclosing the tailgate.To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐moved.

1. Detach the securing straps from the tail‐gate.

2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull itback and out of the bracket, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

MINI Countryman: rear seat backrestsObserve the instructions concerning the safetybelt, refer to page 38. Otherwise, personal pro‐tection may be compromised.

WARNINGDanger of jamming with folding down the

backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk ofproperty damage. Make sure that the area ofmovement of the rear backrest is clear prior tofolding down.◀

The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of40-20-40.When the outer rear seat backrests are foldeddown, it is not permissible for a person to travelon the center seat.Remove the third head restraint, refer topage 42, if necessary.Open the center safety belt and insert it in thebelt holder on the headliner, refer to page 40.Enlarge the cargo area by adjusting the rearseat backrests to a more upright position.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Interior equipment

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 103: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The backrests can be adjusted to 10 differentpositions between the comfort and transportpositions and they can be folded down.In the comfort position, the backrests are tiltedback to the greatest possible angle and in thetransport position they are nearly vertical.Before beginning with the mounting of a childrestraint fixing system, note the instructions,refer to page 45.

1. Hold the top of the backrest, for examplethe head restraint, and pull on the loop, ar‐row.

2. Engage the backrest in the desired positionor fold it down.

Folding the backrests back upWARNINGWith an unlocked backrest, an unsecured

load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure thatthe backrest engages into the locking afterfolding it back.◀

WARNINGThe stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seatadjustment or improper installation of the childseat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the child restraint system fitssecurely against the backrest. If possible, adjustthe backrest tilt for all affected backrests andcorrectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seatsand backrests are securely engaged. If possible,

adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐move them.◀

When the backrests are folded back up, theyengage in the transport position.To set the desired backrest inclination or com‐fort position, hold the backrest, pull the loopforward, and adjust the backrest.

MINI Paceman: rear seat backrests1. Fold the belt buckles down.

2. Pull on the respective loop, arrow.The backrest is unlocked.

3. Fold the backrest forward.

Folding the backrests back upHold the top of the backrest, for example thehead restraint, and fold it back.

WARNINGWith an unlocked backrest, an unsecured

load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure thatthe backrest engages into the locking afterfolding it back.◀

Seite 103

Interior equipment CONTROLS

103Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 104: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Flat loading floorThe maximum load on the loading floor is:330 lbs, 150 kg.

Access to storage areaA storage area for items like the partition net isfound under the loading floor.

1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, on the rearedge of the loading floor.

2. Lift the loading floor at the rear, arrow 1,and fold it forward, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Before closing the tailgate, lower the loadingfloor back onto the cargo area floor.

RemovingThe loading floor can be removed if necessary.

1. Fold up the loading floor.2. Pull it back slightly and out of the holders.3. Then remove it upward.The folded loading floor can be stored in thecargo area.

MINI Countryman: partition net

Before installing1. Remove the pouch with the partition net

from the storage compartment under theloading floor in the cargo area.

2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐roll it, and unfold it.After use, fold and roll up the partition netin the same manner and place it in thepouch so that it can be stowed back underthe cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooksand tensioning buckles do not rest on therod elements.

3. Unfold the partition net to the point wherethe rod elements engage.

Installation behind the front seats

1. Take out the cargo cover if necessary.2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to

Enlarging the cargo area.3. Insert the retaining pins of the partition net

all the way into the front holders in theheadliner, arrow 1, and push forward.

4. Attach the hooks, arrow 2, at the bottom ofthe retaining straps on both sides to theeyelets on the vehicle floor. Firmly attachthe partition net.

5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐sioning buckles.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Interior equipment

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 105: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

RemovingTo remove and stow the partition net, proceedin reverse order.

To fold up, press the release button, arrow.

MINI Countryman: multi-function hook

Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags andtotes, for example, are located on the left andright sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.

WARNINGImproper use of the multifunction hooks

can lead to a danger of objects flying aboutduring braking and evasive maneuvers. There isrisk of injuries and risk of property damage.Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shoppingbags, from the multifunction hooks. Only trans‐port heavy luggage in the cargo area if it hasbeen appropriately secured.◀

Seite 105

Interior equipment CONTROLS

105Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 106: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Storage compartmentsVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

InformationWARNINGLoose objects in the car's interior can be

thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.in the event of an accident or during brakingand evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀

CAUTIONAnti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can

damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀

Storage compartmentsInterior▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 106.▷ Center armrest, refer to page 107.▷ Center rail, refer to page 107.▷ Compartments in the center console.▷ Compartments in the doors.▷ Pockets on the back of the front seat back‐

rests.

▷ Cupholders, refer to page 100.▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 107.

Cargo area▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 118.▷ Storage compartment under the flat load‐

ing floor, refer to page 104.▷ Multi-function hook on the cargo cover

support, refer to page 105.

Glove compartmentOpening

Pull the handle to open the lid.The light in the glove compartment switcheson.

ClosingFold up the cover.

WARNINGFolded open, the glove compartment

protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in theglove compartment can be thrown into thecar's interior while driving, e.g. in the event ofan accident or during braking and evasive ma‐neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always closethe glove compartment immediately after us‐ing it.◀

Seite 106

CONTROLS Storage compartments

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 107: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

VentilationDepending on the vehicle's equipment, theglove compartment can be ventilated and, ifthe cooling function is switched on, cooled.

Opening

Turn the switch in the direction of the arrow.

ClosingMove the switch to the vertical position byturning it in the opposite direction of the arrow.Depending on the temperature setting of theair conditioning or automatic climate control,high temperatures may occur in the glove com‐partment.

Center armrestThe center armrest between the front seatscontains a storage compartment or a cover forthe snap-in adapter, refer to page 145, de‐pending on the equipment.Do not position tall accessory parts directly onthe center rail of the center armrest; otherwise,they may be damaged when the center arm‐rest is opened or closed.

Center armrest front

OpeningPress the button, arrow, and pull up the lid.

Center railRail segmentThe rail segment can be used to secure variousobjects that are placed into the rail against slip‐ping, such as a ball point pen or smartphone.In addition, the connection cable of the smart‐phone can be secured using the rail segment.

1. Twist the rail segment, arrow 1, to removeit.

2. Insert the connection cable centrally intothe recess, arrow 2.

3. Fix the rail segment in the rail.

Clothes hooksClothes hooks are located on the grab handlesin the rear.

WARNINGClothing articles on the clothes hooks can

obstruct the view while driving. There is risk ofan accident. When suspending clothing articles

Seite 107

Storage compartments CONTROLS

107Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 108: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

from the hooks, ensure that they will not ob‐struct the driver's view.◀

WARNINGImproper use of the clothes hooks can

lead to a danger of objects flying about duringbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk ofinjuries and risk of property damage. Only hanglightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles, fromthe clothes hooks.◀

Connection for an exter‐nal audio device

This can be used to connect an external audiodevice, such as a CD or MP3 player.

Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 132.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Storage compartments

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 109: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Seite 109

Storage compartments CONTROLS

109Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 110: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 111: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 112: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Things to remember when drivingVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Breaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need to be broken in to adjust toeach other.The following instructions will help achieve along vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differentialAlways obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDrive at various engine and vehicle speeds, butdo not exceed:▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.Avoid full-throttle operation and use of thetransmission's kickdown mode for the initialmiles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐tion potential until after an initial breaking-inperiod.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimizedcontact and wear patterns between brake padsand discs. Drive cautiously during this break-inperiod.

ClutchThe clutch requires an initial break-in period ofapprox. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op‐timal level.During this break-in period, engage the clutchgently.

Following part replacementThe same breaking in procedures should be ob‐served if any of the components mentionedabove have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

General driving notesGround clearance

CAUTIONIf ground clearance is insufficient, there

might be contact with the front or rear spoilere.g. when driving over curbs or entering intounderground car parking garages. There is riskof property damage. Ensure that there is suffi‐cient ground clearance available.◀

Seite 112

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 113: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Closing the tailgateWARNINGAn open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐

cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐fic participants or damage the vehicle in theevent of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enterthe vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries orrisk of property damage. Do not drive with thetailgate open.◀

If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven withthe tailgate open:▷ Drive moderately.▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.▷ Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly

increase the blower speed.

Hot exhaust systemWARNINGDuring driving operation, high tempera‐

tures can occur underneath the body, e.g.caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come incontact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐tem, these materials can ignite. There is risk ofinjuries or risk of property damage.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make surethat no combustible materials can come in con‐tact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation,idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐haust system.◀

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

WARNINGThe vehicle's performance may be af‐

fected by interference from high frequencyradio signals. These signals are emitted by aseries of transmission systems, such as from airtraffic beacons or relay stations for mobile tele‐communications.

If you have problems of this nature, we recom‐mend that you consult your dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tiretread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,refer to page 160.

Driving through waterDrive though calm water only if it is not deeperthan 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, nofaster than walking speed, up to6 mph/10 km/h.

Using the parking brake on inclinesOn inclines, do not hold the vehicle stationarywith a slipping clutch for extended period; usethe parking brake instead. Otherwise, theclutch will be subject to increased wear.Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer topage 86.

Braking safelyThe vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standardfeature.Applying the brakes fully is the most effectiveway of braking in situations when this is neces‐sary.The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐mum of steering effort.Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.

Seite 113

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

113Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 114: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Objects in the area around the pedalsWARNINGObjects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in thevehicle such that they are secured and cannotenter into the driver's floor area. Use floor matsthat are suitable for the vehicle and can besafely attached to the floor. Do not use loosefloor mats and do not layer several floor mats.Make sure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐curely fastened again after they were removed,e.g. for cleaning.◀

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet or there is heavy rain,briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedalevery few miles.Ensure that this action does not endanger otherroad users.The heat generated in this process helps drythe brake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsDrive long or steep downhill gradients in thegear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ciency.You can increase the engine's braking effect byshifting down, going all the way to first gear, ifnecessary.Downshifting in manual mode of the Steptronictransmission, refer to page 58.

WARNINGLight but consistent brake pressure can

lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing outand possibly even brake failure. There is risk of

an accident. Avoid placing excessive load onthe brake system.◀

WARNINGIn idle or with the engine switched off,

safety-relevant functions are restricted or notavailable anymore, e.g. braking effect of theengine or braking force and steering support.There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idleor with the engine switched off.◀

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐tion on the brake pads are furthered by:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressurethat must be exerted by the pads during brakeapplications to clean the discs is not reached.Should corrosion form on the brake discs, thebrakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐fect that generally cannot be corrected.

When the vehicle is parkedWhen using the automatic climate control, con‐densation water develops that exits under‐neath the vehicle.Therefore, traces of condensed water under thevehicle are normal.After the engine is switched off, the coolantpump may continue running for some time inthe MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en‐gine compartment.

Driving on poor roadsYour MINI with ALL4 all-wheel drive feels com‐fortable on all streets and roads. It combines anall-wheel drive system with the advantages of anormal passenger car.

Seite 114

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 115: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

CAUTIONObjects in unpaved areas, e.g. stones or

branches, can damage the vehicle. There is riskof property damage. Do not drive on unpavedterrain.◀

For your own safety and the safety of passen‐gers and the vehicle, adhere to the followingpoints:▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before

driving; never take risks.▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.

The steeper and rougher the road surfaceis, the lower the speed should be.

▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhillgrades: the engine oil and coolant shouldbe filled nearly to the MAX mark.

▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐cles and drive around these where possible.

▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contactbetween the vehicle body and the ground.The maximum ground clearance is 6 in‐ches/15 cm and may vary with the loadedcargo.

▷ When driving through water, do not exceedthe maximum water height of 12 in‐ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.

▷ After driving through water, press on thebrake pedal several times at low speeds todry the brakes.

▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly,refer to page 85.

▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enablethe driving stability control systems to dis‐tribute the drive force to the individualwheels.

After driving on poor roadsAdhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐cle safety:▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt

and mud from the vehicle body.

▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheelsand tires and check for damage.

Seite 115

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

115Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 116: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

LoadingVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationWARNINGHigh gross weight can overheat the tires,

damage them internally, and cause a suddendrop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of anaccident. Pay attention to the permitted loadcapacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐mitted gross weight.◀

CAUTIONFluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐

age. There is risk of property damage. Makesure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀

WARNINGLoose objects in the car's interior can be

thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.in the event of an accident or during brakingand evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀

Determining the loadlimit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐hicle's placard:▷ The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg orYYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐hicle and unstable driving situationsmay result.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or YYYpounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐sengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed the

Seite 116

DRIVING TIPS Loading

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 117: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

available cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transfered to yourvehicle. Consult the manual for transportinga trailer to determine how this may reducethe available cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity of your vehicle.

Load4-seater:

5-seater:

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and aslow as possible, ideally directly behind thebackrests.

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of

the backrests.▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo.▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 104, to

protect passengers. Make sure that objectscannot penetrate the partition net.

▷ Place protective material around any sharp-edged or pointed objects that could bumpagainst the rear window while the vehicle isin motion.

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Seite 117

Loading DRIVING TIPS

117Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 118: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Securing cargoLashing eyes in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Securing cargo▷ Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight‐

ening belts or straps.▷ Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo

straps.Adhere to the information included withthe cargo straps.

▷ Eight mounting eyes are available for fas‐tening the cargo straps.Two of them are located on the side wall ofthe cargo area, arrows 1, and two are lo‐cated on the rear wall of the cargo area, ar‐rows 2.

WARNINGImproperly stowed objects can shift and

be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in theevent of an accident or during braking and eva‐

sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hitand injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow andsecure objects and cargo properly.Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCHmounting points, refer to page 48; otherwise,these may become damaged.◀

Roof-mounted luggagerackInformationA special rack system is available as an optionalaccessory.

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of the roofrack.Ensure that adequate clearance is available forthe movement of the glass sunroof.

LoadingBecause roof racks raise the vehicle's center ofgravity when loaded, they have a major effecton vehicle handling and steering response.Therefore, note the following when loading anddriving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐

tom.▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with

ratchet straps.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration

and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐tly.

Seite 118

DRIVING TIPS Loading

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 119: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Rear luggage rackInformationA special rear rack is available as an optionalaccessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.Follow the installation instructions for the rearrack.

Anchorage pointsMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The anchorage points are under the covers inthe bumper.Push out the covers on the corresponding cut‐outs.

LoadingWhen loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap‐proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loadsare not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi‐cations in the technical data.

Seite 119

Loading DRIVING TIPS

119Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 120: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Saving fuelVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationYour vehicle contains advanced technology forthe reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐sions.Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors. The implementation of certainmeasures, driving style and regular mainte‐nance can have an influence on fuel consump‐tion and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessarycargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached partsfollowing useRemove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof orrear luggage racks after use.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close both windowsOpen windows causes higher air resistance andthus increases fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflationpressure regularlyCheck and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐tion pressure, refer to page 154, at least twicea month and before starting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away without de‐layDo not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the fastest way for the cold engine toreach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead whendrivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. Toachieve this, maintain a suitable distance to thevehicle driving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and looking ahead reducesfuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speedsUse 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When

Seite 120

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 121: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐gine speeds.When you reach the desired speed, shift intothe highest applicable gear and drive with theengine speed as low as possible and at a con‐stant speed.As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowersfuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use coasting conditionsWhen approaching a red light, take your footoff the accelerator and coast to a halt in thehighest applicable gear.On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐celerator and coast in a suitable gear.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engineduring longer stopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in trafficcongestion.Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.

Switch off any functionsthat are not currentlyneededFunctions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energy andconsume additional fuel, especially in city andstop-and-go traffic.Therefore, switch off these functions if they arenot actually needed.

Have maintenance car‐ried outHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINIrecommends that maintenance work be per‐formed by a MINI dealer’s service center.For information on the MINI Maintenance Sys‐tem, refer to page 172.

Seite 121

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

121Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 122: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

ROCK ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 123: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 124: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Radio MINI Boost CDVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationOverview

1 Change the audio sources.2 On/off, volume.

▷ Press: switch on/off.▷ Turn: adjust the volume.

3 Show the tone settings.4 Function buttons for selecting the menu

items shown directly above them on thedisplay.

5 Change the station or track.

6 Display.7 Select the functions.

▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on thedisplay or set the value.

▷ Press: select the highlighted menu itemor store the settings.

8 Place/end calls.9 Open the main menu.10 Manually select the frequency.

Seite 124

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 125: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

11 CD slot. 12 Eject the CD.

Representation in the Owner's Manual"…" Identifies radio display texts used to selectindividual functions.

Menu navigationRadio and telephone functions can be openedusing buttons on the radio and menus.

Opening menu itemsTo display the menu items:

▷ Press the button once for the audiosources menu.

▷ Press the button for the mainmenu.

Selecting menu itemsThere are several ways to select a menu itemon the display.

Using the right knob

▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,arrow 2.

▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,arrow 1.

Using the function buttonsPress the left or right side of the functionbutton under the menu item.

If only one menu item is displayed above thefunction button, press the middle of the button.

Via the MODE buttonPress the button repeatedly until thedesired audio menu is selected.

Symbols on the display

Symbol Meaning

Function is selected.

Function is activated.

The function is deactivated.

Leave the menu, one menu back.

Display additional menu items.

Scroll display. The list contains morethan two entries.

Change to the higher level directory.

Setting valuesFor setting numerical values or values on ascale:

1. Mark the desired menu item and press theright knob.

2. Turn the right knob to set the value.3. Press the right knob to store the value.

Switching on/offPress the left knob. The radio selects the audiosource set last: radio, satellite radio, CD, exter‐nal audio device, or USB audio interface.

Listening to the radio with the ignitionswitched offWhen the radio ready state or the ignition isswitched off, the radio functions are available

Seite 125

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

125Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 126: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

for approx. 20 minutes. To listen to the radio,switch it back on.To spare the battery, ensure that the radio isswitched off when you leave the vehicle.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the left knob. Settings are stored for theremote control currently in use.When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐tem, the audio sources are muted.

Speed-dependent volume and volumesof PDC signal tone and gong▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone com‐

pared to the audio sources.▷ "GONG": volume of the gong compared to

the audio sources.▷ "S-VOL": speed-dependent volume control.Set the audio sources to a high volume to beable to adjust the volume of the signal tonesmore easily.

1. Press the button.2. Select the symbol if necessary.3. Select the desired volume setting.4. Set the desired volume and press the right

knob.

Volume of external audio devicesAn external audio device such as an MP3 playercan be connected via the AUX-IN port in thecenter console and the audio tracks can beplayed over the car's loudspeaker system.The volume of the external audio device can beadjusted to the car radio.

1. Press the button.2. "AUX"3. "Vol-AUX"4. Set the desired volume and press the right

knob.

Tone settings▷ "BASS": depth adjustment.▷ "TREBLE": treble adjustment.▷ "FADER": front/rear volume distribution.▷ "BAL": left/right volume distribution.The sound settings are set globally for all audiosources.

Setting the treble, bass, and volumedistribution

1. Press the button.2. Highlight the desired tone setting and press

the right knob.3. Create the desired setting and press the

right knob.

Resetting the tone settingsThe tone settings are reset to medium values.

1. Press the button.2. "RESET"

Time

Setting the time, date, and time format1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "CONFIG"4. "TIME"5. Select the desired category.6. Create the settings and press the right

knob.

Seite 126

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 127: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Setting the units of measure of thecomputer and the language1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "CONFIG"4. ▷ "DIST": change the unit of measure for

the range.▷ "LANG": select the language of the dis‐

play texts.▷ "CONSMP": change the unit of measure

for the average fuel consumption.▷ "TEMP": change the unit of measure for

the external temperature.5. Highlight the desired menu item and press

the button.6. Create the desired setting.

ComputerThe following vehicle information can be call upvia the computer:▷ Average fuel consumption▷ Average speed▷ Range

Displaying information1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "COMP"

Average fuel consumptionThe average fuel consumption is calculated forthe time during which the engine is running.To start calculation of the average fuel con‐sumption:

1. "CONSMP"2. "RESET"

The previous display is set to zero and the sys‐tem begins recalculating the average fuel con‐sumption.

Average speedThe average speed is calculated for the timeduring which the engine is running.To start calculation of the average speed:

1. "SPEED"2. "RESET"

Estimated range"RANGE"The display shows the estimated distance thatcan be still be driven on the remaining fuel,taking into consideration the driving style overthe last 18 miles/30 km.

RadioListening to the radioThe radio is designed for reception in the FMand AM wavebands.

1. Switch on the radio, refer to page 125.

2. Press this button if necessary.3. "TUNER"4. "FM" or"AM"

Press the corresponding button repeatedlyuntil the desired waveband is displayed.▷ FM: FM1, FM2, FMA▷ AM: AM, AMA

Selecting a stationSettings are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.

Next station

Press the button.

Seite 127

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

127Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 128: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The next station with reception is selected.

Selecting the station manually byfrequency

1. Press the button.2. ▷ Press the respective function button to

set the desired frequency.▷ Turn the right knob until the desired

frequency is set.

Automatically updating the stationswith the best reception, AUTOSTOREIn the FMA and AMA memory levels, stationsare automatically stored according to their re‐ception strength. If the AUTOSTORE function isnot used, six stations can be manually stored ineach of the FMA and AMA memory levels.

1. "FM" or"AM"Press the corresponding button until thefollowing is displayed:"AUTOSTORE"

It may take several seconds for the stations tobe stored and for one of these stations to beplayed back.

Briefly playing and selecting a station"SC"All stations with reception are played briefly.To interrupt the function and select a station:"SC"

Storing and retrieving a station

Memory locationsIt is possible to store up to 30 stations.▷ FM1, FM2, AM: six stations each.▷ FMA, AMA: the six stations with the best re‐

ception (automatically) or any six stations(manually).

Storing a station1. "FM" or"AM"

Select the desired function repeatedly untilthe desired waveband is displayed.

2. Select the station.3. "1" ... "6"

Press and hold the function button underthe desired memory location until the sta‐tion is audible again after a brief interrup‐tion.

Retrieving a stored station1. "FM" or"AM"

Select the desired function repeatedly untilthe desired waveband is displayed.

2. "1" ... "6"Press and hold the desired function buttonor turn the right knob until the desired sta‐tion is displayed.

Radio Data System, RDSRDS broadcasts additional information, such asthe station name or text messages, in the FMwaveband. When playing a station with multi‐ple frequencies, the system automaticallyswitches to the frequency with the best recep‐tion, if needed.Some stations broadcast the type of programreceived, or PTY, via RDS. This information isdisplayed briefly when the station is selected,for instance NEWS.PTY can also be used to display catastrophealerts, such as "ALARM".The alert is issued on the loudspeakers.

Switching the RDS on/off1. "SET"2. "RDS"When the RDS is switched off, the PTY functionis switched off as well.

Seite 128

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 129: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Switching the program type displayon/off1. "SET"2. "PTY"

HD Radio™ receptionMany stations broadcast both analog and digi‐tal signals. These stations can be received digi‐tally and therefore with better sound quality. Adigital radio network must be available to beable to receive digital stations.License conditionsHD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radioreception

1. Press the button.2. "TUNER"3. "SET"4. "HD"

Displays▷ "HD": a station is received digitally.▷ "(HD)": a station broadcasts digital signals

but digital radio reception is switched off.In areas in which the selected station is notcontinuously received in digital mode, playbackswitches between analog and digital reception.In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Selecting the programs of a digitalstationSome stations broadcast multiple programs. Toselect one of these programs:

1. Press the button repeatedlyuntil the desired digital station is displayed.If a station broadcasts multiple programs,

the following display appears, for example:"HD1"

2. "LIST"3. "HD1" ... "HD8" Select the desired pro‐

gram. Up to eight programs can be se‐lected per station.

Displaying additional informationFor digital stations, additional information canbe displayed on the current track, such as thename of the artist."INFO"

Operational displays▷ "acquiring": the system is looking for digital

stations.▷ "No Signal": no digital stations are being re‐

ceived.

Satellite radioOver 100 different channels with high fidelitycan be received. The channels are offered infixed packages and must be activated.You may experience signal drops and mutingevents related to this new technology.

Activating or deactivated channels

1. Press the button.2. "SAT"3. "CAT"4. Select the desired category.

The channels are displayed. This symbol identifies the current chan‐

nel.

Activating1. Turn the right knob to select a channel that

is not yet activated.2. Press the right knob to confirm a channel.

Seite 129

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

129Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 130: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

A phone number and the electronic serialnumber, ESN, are displayed. The electronicserial number is required for activation.

3. To have the channels activated, call thephone number.

Deactivating

1. Press the button.2. "SAT"3. "SAT"

Hold the button down.A phone number and the electronic serialnumber, ESN, are displayed. The electronicserial number is required for deactivation.

4. To have the channels deactivated, call thephone number.

Selecting and storing a channel

1. Press the button.2. "SAT"3. "CAT"4. Select the desired category.5. Select the desired channel.To display all channels:"ALL"To store a channel:

1. Select the symbol.2. "SAT"

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐sired memory level, SAT 1 or SAT 2, isreached.

3. "1" ... "6"Press and hold the function button underthe desired memory location until thechannel is audible again after a brief inter‐ruption.

Changing to the current channel"CURR"

Additional informationThe name of the channel and additional infor‐mation on the current track are displayed, suchas the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired channel.2. "INFO"

Changing the channel using the buttons

Press the button for the corre‐sponding direction. The next enabled channelis opened.

Search

1. Press and hold the button forthe corresponding direction. The activatedchannels appear on the display one afterthe other.

2. Release the button to select the displayedchannel.

InformationWhen there is a signal blockage or the trans‐mission is suspended momentarily for morethan 4 seconds, a message will appear on thedisplay.Service may be interrupted or unavailable forspecific reasons such as environmental or topo‐graphic conditions and others that SatelliteRadio cannot directly control. Signal may not beavailable under tunnels, in parking garages,next to tall buildings, nearby trees with densefoliage, nearby mountains or other possiblestrong sources of radio interference. Serviceshould resume normally after the source of sig‐nal unavailability has been cleared.

CD playerLoading the CD playerInsert the CD into the CD drive with the printedside up.

Seite 130

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 131: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Playback begins automatically.Reading can take a few minutes with com‐pressed audio files.

Starting the CD playerA CD is contained in the CD player.

1. Switch on the car radio if necessary.

2. Press the button.3. "CD"

Skipping to another track

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired track is played.With the right knob:Turn the right knob until the desired track isplayed back.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold the button down.Tracks can be heard but are distorted.

Briefly playing and selecting a track"SC"All tracks are played briefly one after the other.To interrupt the function and select a track:"SC"

Random playback"RND"To end random playback:"RND"

Compressed audio filesCD players can play back CDs with compressedaudio data: MP3 and WMA.

Selecting a track1. "LIST"2. Select the desired directory using the right

knob.▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐

rectory.▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐

rectory.3. Select other directories if you wish.4. Highlight the desired track and press the

right knob.You can scroll through the directories duringplayback.To change to the current track:"CURR"

Displaying information on the trackAny information stored on the currently se‐lected track can be displayed.

1. "LIST"2. "TRACK"

Ejecting a CD from the CD player

Press the button.The CD emerges slightly from the CD drive.

Operational displays▷ "Insert CD"

The CD slot is empty.▷ "Error CD"

The CD cannot be read or is not working.▷ "Temp. CD"

Operating temperature is too high.

Seite 131

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

131Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 132: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Information

CD playerWARNINGCD/DVD players and changers are offi‐

cially designated Class 1 laser products. Laserscan damage the retina of the eye. There is riskof injuries. Do not use the CD/DVD player orchanger, if the cover is damaged.◀

CDsCAUTIONWith use of non-compatible CD sizes, the

CD can get jammed and it may not be possibleto pull it out again. Labels applied after the factcan loosen during playback. There is risk ofproperty damage.▷ Do not use any CDs with labels applied after

the fact.▷ Only use round CDs with a standard diame‐

ter of 4.7 inches/12 cm and do not playback any CDs with adapters, e.g. single CDs.

▷ Do not use any combined CD/DVDs, e. g.DVD Plus.◀

General malfunctions▷ The CD players have been optimized for

performance in vehicles. In some instancesthey may be more sensitive to faulty CDsthan stationary devices would be.

▷ If a CD cannot be played, first check if it hasbeen inserted correctly.

HumidityHigh levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem‐porarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with particular CDsIf malfunctions occur only with particular CDs,this can be due to one of the following causes:

Self-recorded CDs▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-

recorded CDs are inconsistent data creationor recording processes, or poor quality orold age of the blank CD.

▷ Only label CDs on the upper side with a penintended for this purpose.

Damage▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture.▷ Store CDs in a sleeve.▷ Do not subject CDs to temperatures over

50 ℃/122 ℉, high humidity, or direct sun‐light.

CDs with copy protectionCDs are often provided with a copy protectionfeature by the manufacturer. This can meanthat some CDs cannot be played or can only beplayed to a limited extent.

MACROVISIONThis product contains copyrighted technologythat is based on multiple registered US patentsand the intellectual property of the MacrovisionCorporation and other manufacturers. The useof this copy protection must be approved byMacrovision. Media protected by this product -unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -may only be used for private purposes. Copyingof this technology is prohibited.

External devicesAUX-IN port

Overview▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicleloudspeakers.

Seite 132

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 133: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Recommendation: use medium tone andvolume settings on the audio device. Thetone depends on the quality of the audiofiles.

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the centerconsole.Connect the headphone connec‐tor or line-out connector of thedevice to the AUX-IN port.

Ensure that the connector is inserted all theway into the AUX-IN port.

Playback1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.

2. Press the button.3. "AUX"

VolumeThe volume of the sound output is dependenton the audio device. If this volume differsmarkedly from the volume of the other audiosources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume

1. Press the button.2. "AUX"

3. "Vol-AUX"4. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.

USB audio interface

OverviewIt is possible to connect external audio devices.The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak‐ers.

Connectors for external devices▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones thatare supported by the USB audio interface.

▷ External audio devices, e.g. MP3 player:connection via AUX-IN socket.

▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer topage 145, when equipped with the musicinterface for smartphones: Apple iPhone ormobile phones.Playback is only possible if no audio deviceis connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Due to the large number of different audio de‐vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐sured that every audio device/mobile phone isoperable on the vehicle. Further information isavailable at www.mini.com/connectivity orfrom a dealer’s service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop.

Audio filesStandard audio files can be played back:▷ MP3.▷ WMA.▷ WAV (PCM).▷ AAC, M4A.▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

Seite 133

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

133Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 134: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

File systemStandard file systems for USB devices are sup‐ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

Connecting

The USB audio interface is in thecenter console.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USBaudio interfaceTo connect the iPod, use the special cableadapter for the Apple iPod. Further informationis available from a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop oron the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivityConnect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX-IN port and USB interface.The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USBaudio interfaceConnect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐tect the USB audio interface and the USB deviceagainst physical damage.Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

Audio deviceConnect the headphone connector or line-outconnector of the device to the AUX-IN port ofthe USB audio interface.

Ensure that the connector is inserted all theway into the AUX-IN port.

After connecting for the first timeInformation on all music tracks, e.g. artist ortype of music, as well as playback lists aretransmitted into the vehicle. This may takesome time, depending on the USB device andthe number of tracks.During transmission, the tracks can be called upvia the file directory.

Number of tracksInformation from up to four USB devices or forapprox. 20,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if morethan 20,000 tracks are stored, information onexisting tracks may be deleted.

Copy protectionMusic tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback

1. Press the button.2. "IPOD" or "USB" or "AUX"

Changing the music track

Skipping to another trackIt is possible to skip to another track within theselected directory.

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired track is played.With the right knob:Turn the right knob until the desired track isplayed back.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold the button down.Tracks can be heard but are distorted.

Seite 134

ENTERTAINMENT Radio MINI Boost CD

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 135: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Random playback"RND"To end random playback: "RND"

Selecting a trackDepending on the connected device, the trackcan be selected via the following category:▷ "LIST": playback lists.▷ "GEN": musical genre.▷ "ART": artist.▷ "ALB": album.1. Select the desired category.2. If necessary, select the desired directory us‐

ing the right knob.▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐

rectory.▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐

rectory.3. Select other directories if you wish.4. Highlight the desired track and press the

right knob.You can scroll through the directories duringplayback.To change to the current track:"CURR"

Displaying information on the trackAny information stored on the currently se‐lected track can be displayed."TRACK"

Adjusting the volumeThe volume of the sound output is dependenton the audio device. If this volume differsmarkedly from the volume of the other audiosources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

1. "LEV"2. Turn the right knob until the desired vol‐

ume is set and press the knob.

InformationDo not expose the audio device to extreme en‐vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐peratures; refer to the audio device operatinginstructions.Depending on the configuration of the audiofiles, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, thefiles may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection▷ It is only possible to connect one iPod/

iPhone to the vehicle at a time.▷ Playback from the iPod/iPhone is only pos‐

sible via the USB audio interface if a snap-inadapter is not used.

▷ The connected audio device is suppliedwith a max. power of 500 mA if supportedby the device. Therefore, do not addition‐ally connect the device to a socket in thevehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐promised.

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐nector into the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans orlamps to the USB audio interface.

▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐

charge external devices.

Seite 135

Radio MINI Boost CD ENTERTAINMENT

135Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 136: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

CONNECT ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 137: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 138: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

TelephoneVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

OverviewThe conceptMobile phones can be connected with the vehi‐cle via Bluetooth.After a compatible mobile phone is paired withthe vehicle once, you can operate the mobilephone via the radio, the buttons on the steer‐ing wheel, and via voice activation.Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐tooth® SIG, Inc.Certain functions may need to be enabled bythe mobile phone provider or service provider.

WARNINGOperating the integrated information sys‐

tems and communication devices while drivingcan distract from traffic. It is possible to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Only use the systems or devices when thetraffic situation allows. If necessary stop anduse the systems and devices while the vehicle isstationary.◀

Snap-in adapterThe snap-in adapter is used to:

▷ Hold the mobile phone.▷ Recharge the battery.▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside

antenna of the vehicle.This provides for better network receptionand consistent sound quality.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

Compatible mobile phonesDetails on which mobile phones with a Blue‐tooth interface are supported by the mobilephone preparation package can be obtained atwww.mini.com/connectivity.

InformationAt high temperatures, the charging function ofthe mobile phone may be limited and functionsmay not be executed.

Control elements

1 Display.2 Function buttons for selecting the menu

items shown directly above them on thedisplay.

3 Redial, accept a call, start dialing, terminatea call and change to the Telephone menu.

Seite 138

COMMUNICATION Telephone

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 139: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

4 ▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on thedisplay or set the value.

▷ Press: select the highlighted menu itemor store the setting.

5 Open the main menu.6 On/off, volume control.

Menu navigationSelecting menu itemsThere are two ways to select a menu item onthe display.

Using the right knob

▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,arrow 2.

▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,arrow 1.

Using the function buttonsPress the left or right side of the functionbutton under the menu item.

If only one menu item is displayed above thefunction button, press the middle of the button.

Representation in the Owner's Manual"…" Identifies radio display texts used to selectindividual functions.

Symbols on the display

Symbol Meaning

Function is selected.

Leave the menu, one menu back.

Display additional menu items.

Scroll display. The list contains morethan two entries.

Reception of the wireless network:the display depends on the signalstrength.

Using the hands-free system.

Roaming is active.

Pairing/unpairing themobile phoneRequirements▷ The mobile phone is compatible, refer to

page 138.▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone.▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be

made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐nection without confirmation or visibility,refer to the mobile phone operating in‐structions.

▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐tooth passkey. It is only required once forpairing.

▷ The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating BluetoothBluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Complywith all safety guidelines and regulations.

Seite 139

Telephone COMMUNICATION

139Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 140: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

To activate the connection:

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT-ON"To deactivate the connection again:

1. "BT"2. "BT-OFF"3. "YES"

Pairing and connectingWARNINGOperating the integrated information sys‐

tems and communication devices while drivingcan distract from traffic. It is possible to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is risk of an acci‐dent.Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐fic situation allows. If necessary stop and usethe systems and devices while the vehicle isstationary.◀

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT"5. "PAIR"

Turn the right knob to display the Bluetoothname of your vehicle.

6. To perform additional steps on the mobilephone, refer to the mobile phone operatinginstructions: for instance, search for or con‐nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appearson the mobile phone display.

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle onthe mobile phone display.

You are prompted by the radio or mobilephone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐key.

8. Enter the passkey on the mobile phone andconfirm it.

9. "ADD"10. Enter the same passkey on the radio using

the function buttons and confirm it.To delete the last digit: "DELETE"

11. "OK"Press twice if necessary.

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone ap‐pears on the radio display.Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐hicle at once.If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐fer to page 141.

Repeating the pairing procedure/helpIf pairing failed:

1. "REPEAT"2. Repeat steps 6 to 10.To display the Customer Relations phone num‐ber: "CALLS"Turn the right knob to display the Customer Re‐lations phone number and information neededfor pairing.

Following the initial pairing▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of timewhen the engine is running or the ignitionis switched on.

▷ The phone book entries of the telephonestored on the SIM card or mobile phone aretransmitted to the vehicle after detection,depending on the mobile phone.

▷ Specific settings may be necessary in somemobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐cure connection; refer to the mobile phoneoperating instructions.

Seite 140

COMMUNICATION Telephone

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 141: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Connecting a particular mobile phone1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT"5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone

to be connected is displayed.6. "PRIO"

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐sired position is reached.

Unpairing the mobile phone1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "BT"5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone

to be unpaired is displayed.6. "DELETE"7. "YES"

What to do if...Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐fer to page 138.The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐nected.▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth onthe vehicle and on the mobile phone.

▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobilephone and the vehicle match? Enter thesame passkey on the mobile phone and onthe radio.

▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enterthe passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connectedto the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐nections with other devices if necessary.

▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode ordoes it have only a limited remaining bat‐tery life? Charge the mobile phone in thesnap-in adapter or via the charging cable.

▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connectedmobile phone from the vehicle and pairand connect only one mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts?▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone toextreme environmental conditions.

No phone book entries or only some phonebook entries are displayed, or they are incom‐plete.▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete.▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM cardare transmitted.

▷ It may not be possible to display phonebook entries with special characters.

▷ The number of phone book entries to bestored is too high.

▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,e. g., due to stored information such asnotes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐tact.

The phone connection quality is poor.▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, dependingon the mobile phone.

▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-inadapter or place it in the area of the centerconsole.

▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone andloudspeakers.

Seite 141

Telephone COMMUNICATION

141Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 142: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

If all points in this list have been checked andthe required function is still not available, con‐tact the hotline or a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repair shop.

Controls▷ Accept/reject a call.▷ Dial a phone number.▷ Dial a phone number from the phone book.▷ Dial a stored phone number, such as from

the list of accepted calls.▷ End the call.When the ignition and the radio ready state areswitched off, such as after the remote control isremoved, an existing call can be continued forup to 25 minutes on the hands-free system.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐lected. Settings are stored for the remote con‐trol currently in use.

The ringer volume of incoming calls and the callvolume can be adjusted independently.When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐tem, the audio sources are muted.

Switching the microphone to muteWhen a call is active, the microphone can bemuted."MUTE"

A microphone that has been switched to muteis automatically reactivated when a new con‐nection is established.

Incoming call

Receiving callsIf the number of the caller is stored in thephone book and is transmitted by the network,the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐wise, only the phone number is displayed.

Accepting a callBriefly press the button on the steeringwheel or radio.

or"YES"

Rejecting a call"NO"

Ending a callBriefly press the button on the steeringwheel or radio.

or"END"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "#"5. Enter the desired phone number on the

buttons 0–9.

Seite 142

COMMUNICATION Telephone

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 143: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

To delete the last digit: "DEL"

6. Briefly press the button on thesteering wheel or radio.orPress the right knob to dial the phone num‐ber.

Phone bookDialed phone numbers, incoming calls and en‐tries in the phone book are stored on lists if themobile phone is connected to the vehicle viaBluetooth.Five lists are available:▷ "A-Z"

Entries of the phone book of the SIM cardor of the mobile phone, which consist of aname and phone number, are sorted in al‐phabetical order.

▷ "TOP8"The Top 8 list contains the eight phonenumbers that were dialed most frequently.

▷ "LAST8"The last eight phone numbers that were di‐aled are stored. The phone number dialedlast is at the top of the list.

▷ "CALLS"The phone numbers of the last eight ac‐cepted calls are stored. For this to be possi‐ble, it must be possible to transmit thephone number of the caller.

▷ "MISSED"The phone numbers of the last eight callsthat were not accepted are stored. For thisto be possible, it must be possible to trans‐mit the phone number of the caller.

Dialing a phone number from the phonebookThe list A-Z is available for phone book entries.If entries with different names but the samephone number are transferred to the vehicle

from the mobile phone, only one entry is dis‐played.The display of the phone book entries on theradio may differ from the display on the mobilephone, such as the order of the first and lastnames.

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. "A-Z"5. The arrows indicate that additional

letters can be displayed.Turn the right knob to display additionalletters if necessary.

6. Turn the right knob to select the first letterof the entry.

7. Select the entry with the function button.The phone number is dialed.

To display all entries:

1. Turn the right knob to select the first letterof the entry and press the knob.

2. Turn the right knob to select the desiredentry and press the knob.or

Press the button on the steeringwheel or radio to dial the number.

The phone number is dialed.

Editing and dialing a phone numberfrom the phone bookYou can edit the phone number of an entry be‐fore making a call. This change is not stored inthe phone book.

1. Selecting an entry.2. "EDIT"3. To delete a digit: "DEL"

Seite 143

Telephone COMMUNICATION

143Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 144: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

4. Enter additional digits on the buttons 0–9.5. Press the right knob to dial the phone num‐

ber.

Dialing a phone number from the phonebook using the buttons on the steeringwheel

1. Press and hold the button to dis‐play the Telephone menu.

2. Press the arrow buttons on the steeringwheel to leaf through the phone book.

3. Press the button to dial the phonenumber.

Dialing a phone number stored in a listTo select an entry and establish a connection:

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐tion.

2. Press the button.3. "PHONE"4. Select a list, for instance "TOP8"5. Turn the right knob to select an entry and

press the knob to dial the phone number.

Deleting an individual entry1. Select an entry from the list.2. "DEL"

DTMF suffix dialingDTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐cess to network services or for controlling devi‐ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐swering machine. The DTMF code is needed forthis purpose.This function is only available if a connectionexists and if the hands-free system is beingused.

1. "KEYPAD"2. Enter the DTMF code on the buttons 0–9.

3. If necessary, press and hold the functionbutton on the right or left to enter specialcharacters.

Displaying the call durationDuring a call:"DURAT"

Hands-free system

General informationCalls that are being made on the hands-freesystem can be continued on the mobile phoneand vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-free systemCalls that were begun outside of the Bluetoothrange of the vehicle can be continued on thehands-free system with the ignition switchedon.Depending on the mobile phone, the systemautomatically switches to the hands-free sys‐tem.If the system does not switch over automati‐cally, follow the instructions on the mobilephone display; refer also to the mobile phoneoperating instructions.

From the hands-free system to themobile phoneCalls that are made on the hands-free systemcan in some cases be continued on the mobilephone; this depends on the mobile phone.Follow the instructions on the mobile phonedisplay; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐ing instructions.

MINI phone numbersWhen the ignition is switched on, various serv‐ice phone numbers can be displayed.

Seite 144

COMMUNICATION Telephone

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 145: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ "Road Assist": Roadside Assistance, if helpis required in the event of a breakdown.

▷ "Serv. Appt.": MINI service center, if a serv‐ice appointment needs to be arranged.

▷ "Cust Relat": Customer Relations, for infor‐mation on all aspects of your vehicle.

Displaying the phone numbers1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

2. Press the button.3. "MINI"4. Turn the right knob until the desired phone

number is displayed.

Snap-in adapterGeneral informationFor more information about snap-in adaptersthat support the functions of the mobile phonein a compatible way, contact a dealer's servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.

InformationAt high temperatures, the charging function ofthe mobile phone may be limited and functionsmay not be executed.When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,note the operating instructions of the mobilephone.

Installation positionIn the center armrest.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter1. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the

cover, arrow 2.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐gages.

To remove:To remove the snap-in adapter, press the but‐ton.

Inserting the mobile phone1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con‐nector and from the USB connection of themobile phone.

2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobilephone up toward the electrical contacts, ar‐

Seite 145

Telephone COMMUNICATION

145Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 146: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

row 1, and press it down until it engages,arrow 2.

The battery is charged beginning with the radioready state of the vehicle.

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the mo‐bile phone, arrow 2.

Seite 146

COMMUNICATION Telephone

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 147: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Seite 147

Telephone COMMUNICATION

147Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 148: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 149: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 150: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

RefuelingVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationCAUTIONWith a range of less than 30 miles/50 km

it is possible that the engine will no longer havesufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longerensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐fuel promptly.◀

Fuel capOpening1. Open fuel filler flap.2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler flap.

Closing1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.2. Close the fuel filler flap.

WARNINGThe retaining strap of the fuel cap be

jammed and crushed during closing. In thiscase, the lid cannot be correctly closed and fuelvapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of inju‐ries or risk of property damage. Pay attentionthat the retaining strap is not jammed orcrushed when closing the lid.◀

A message is displayed if the cap is loose ormissing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapIn the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flapcan be released manually:MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Seite 150

MOBILITY Refueling

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 151: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1. Open the cargo area trim, arrow.2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump

symbol.This opens the fuel filler flap.

Observe the followingwhen refuelingWhen refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuelpump nozzle during refueling causes:▷ Premature pump shutoff.▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐

ery system.The fuel tank is full after refueling is resumedtwice after the filler nozzle switches off for thefirst time.

CAUTIONFuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling

of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.On contact with painted surfaces, damage mayoccur to these surfaces. The environment ispolluted. There is risk of property damage.Avoid overfilling.◀

Obey safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐tion.

Fuel tank capacityApprox. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including a re‐serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

Seite 151

Refueling MOBILITY

151Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 152: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

FuelFuel recommendationVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

GasolineFor the best fuel economy, the gasoline shouldbe sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuelpump as containing metals.

CAUTIONEven small amounts of wrong fuel or

wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalyticconverter is permanently damaged. There isrisk of property damage. Do not refuel or addthe following in the case of gasoline engines:▷ Leaded gasoline.▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.The ethanol should fulfill the following qualitystandards:US: ASTM 4806–xxCAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

CAUTIONWrong fuels can damage the fuel system

and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanolpercentage than recommended or one withother types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀

The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, youcan refuel with different recommended fuelgrades.

Recommended fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 91.John Cooper Works:MINI recommends AKI 93.

Minimum fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 89.

CAUTIONFuel that does not comply with the mini‐

mum quality can compromise engine functionor cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does notcomply with the minimum quality.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

CAUTIONThe use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ally, problems relating to drivability, startingand stalling, especially under certain environ‐mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐perature and high altitude, may occur.

Seite 152

MOBILITY Fuel

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 153: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ommend switching to a high quality gasolinebrand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐nance.◀

Seite 153

Fuel MOBILITY

153Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 154: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Wheels and tiresVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Tire inflation pressureSafety informationIt is not merely the tires' service life, but alsodriving comfort and, to a great extent, drivingsafety that depend on the condition of the tiresand the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐sure.

Checking the pressureTires naturally lose pressure uniformly across allfour tires.

WARNINGA tire with low or missing tire inflation

pressure impacts handling, such as steeringand braking response. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure,and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a monthand before a long trip.◀

Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflationpressure increases along with the tire's temper‐ature. The tire inflation pressure specificationsapply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐ture.Only check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after a maximum of

1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehiclehas been parked for at least 2 hours. When thetires are warm, the tire inflation pressure ishigher.After correcting the tire inflation pressure, resetthe Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 80or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 78.

Pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table contains all tireinflation pressure specifications for the speci‐fied tire sizes at the ambient temperature. Thetire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizesapproved by the manufacturer of the vehiclefor the vehicle type.For correct identification of the right tire infla‐tion pressures, observe the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle▷ Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to100 mph or 160 km/hFor normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,adjust pressures to the respective tire inflationpressures listed on the following pages in thecolumn for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.These tire inflation pressures can also be foundon the driver's side door pillar when the driver'sdoor is open.MINI Countryman:

Seite 154

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 155: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Paceman:

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire inflation pressures for drivingabove 100 mph or 160 km/h

WARNINGIn order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures forspeeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from therelevant table on the following pages. Other‐wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Observe all national and local maximum speedlimits; otherwise, violations of the laws couldoccur.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 209.

Seite 155

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

155Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 156: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper S/Countryman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 209.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 209.

Seite 156

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 157: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 210.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC205/55 R 17 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 210.

Seite 157

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

157Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 158: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the tableare indicated in bar/PSI with coldtires.Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std225/45 R 18 91 V RSC225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 210.

Tire identification marksKnowledge of the labeling on the side of thetire makes it easier to identify and choose theright tires.

Tire sizeExample: 225/45 R 17 91 V225: nominal width in mm45: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code17: rim diameter in inches91: load rating, not for ZR tires

Speed letterQ = up to 100 mph/160 km/hT = up to 118 mph/190 km/hH = up to 131 mph/210 km/hV = up to 150 mph/240 km/hW = up to 167 mph/270 km/hY = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines ofthe U.S. Department of Transportation.DOT code:DOT xxxx xxx 2214xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design2214: tire age

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B CAll passenger car tires must conform to FederalSafety Requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Seite 158

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 159: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in driving hab‐its, service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire's ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under control‐led conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐quired by law.

WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresThe symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circlewith the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer topage 162.

M+SWinter and all-season tires.These have better winter properties thansummer tires.

XLDesignation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire treadSummer tiresThe tread depth should not be less than0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation,for example, requires a minimum tread depthof only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths lessthan 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger ofhydroplaning even in low water depths and atraised speeds.

Winter tiresThe suitability of winter tires for winter drivingis reduced noticeably when their tread depthbecomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Seite 159

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

159Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 160: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib‐uted around the circumference of the tire andare marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, TreadWear Indicator. When the tire tread has beenworn down to the wear indicators, a tread hasreached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

Tire damageGeneral informationInspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

InformationDriving over rough or damaged road surfaces,as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles cancause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐pension parts. This is more likely to occur withlow-profile tires, which provide less cushioningbetween the wheel and the road. Be careful toavoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐functions:▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,road damage and similar situations.

WARNINGDamaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐

sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.There is risk of an accident. If tire damage issuspected while driving, immediately reducespeed and stop. Have wheels and tireschecked. For this purpose, drive carefully to thenearest dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop. Havevehicle towed or transported as needed.◀

WARNINGDamaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐

sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.There is risk of an accident. Do not repair dam‐aged tires, but have them replaced.◀

Tire ageRecommendationFor several reasons, among other things be‐cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac‐turer of your MINI recommends mounting newtires at the latest after six years, regardless ofthe actual wear.

Manufacture dateThe date of manufacture of the tires is specifiedin the tire label:DOT … 2015: the tire was manufactured inweek 20 of 2015.

Changing wheels andtiresMountingHave mounting and wheel balancing carriedout by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 160

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 161: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Wheel and tire combinationInformation on the right wheel/tire combina‐tion and wheel rim versions for your vehicle canbe obtained from the dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repair shop.Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impairthe function of a variety of systems such as ABSor DSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

WARNINGWheels and tires which are not suitable

for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐cle, e.g. due to contact with the body due totolerances despite the same official size rating.There is risk of an accident.◀

Wheels with electronics for TPM TirePressure MonitorWhen mounting new tires or changing fromsummer to winter tires or vice versa, only usewheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, theTire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detecta flat tire, refer to page 79. A dealer’s servicecenter will be glad to answer any questions youmay have.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐hicle recommends certain tire brands. Thesecan be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

Retreaded tiresWARNINGRetreaded tires can have different tire

casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle doesnot recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀

Winter tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendswinter tires for winter roads or at temperaturesbelow +45 ℉/+7 ℃.Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐vide better winter traction than summer tires,they do not provide the same level of perform‐ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then display a corresponding sign in the field ofvision. The sign is available from the tire dealeror from a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.With mounted winter tires, observe and adhereto the permissible maximum speed.

Seite 161

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

161Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 162: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Run-flat tiresWhen mounting new tires or changing fromsummer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compactwheel is not available in case of a flat tire. Adealer’s service center will be glad to answerany questions you may have.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns occur on the front andrear axles, depending on the individual condi‐tions of use.To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheelscan be rotated between the axles. A dealer’sservice center will be glad to answer any ques‐tions you may have.After changing the tires, check the tire inflationpressure and correct it if necessary.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tiresLabel

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circlewith the letters RSC on the sidewall.

Run-flat tires are tires that support themselvesfor a limited period of time, and they may alsocome with special rims. The sidewall reinforce‐ment ensures that the tire can continue to beused to a limited extent if it has lost pressureand even if it has become completely depres‐surized.For continued driving in the event of a flat tire,refer to page 78.

Correcting a flat tireSafety measures▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible from

passing traffic and on solid ground. Switchon the hazard warning system.

▷ Let the steering wheel lock engage with thewheels in the straight-ahead position, setthe parking brake, and engage first gear orreverse, or engage selector lever position P.

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out‐side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazardwarning lamp is required, set it up on theroadside at an appropriate distance fromthe rear of the vehicle. Comply with allsafety guidelines and regulations.

The procedure to correct a flat tire depends onthe equipment in the vehicle:▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 162.▷ MINI Mobility System, refer to page 162.

MINI Mobility SystemInformation▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐

lity System found on the compressor andsealant bottle.

Seite 162

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 163: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐tive if tire damage is greater than approx.1/8 in/4 mm in size.

▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop if thetire cannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodiesthat have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealantbottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

Sealant and compressor

1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker2 Filling hose

Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.

3 Holder for the sealant bottle4 Compressor5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/

socket in passenger compartment  101.6 Connection hose for connecting the com‐

pressor and sealant bottle or the compres‐sor and wheel

7 On/off switch

8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla‐tion pressure

9 Release button for reducing the tire infla‐tion pressure

The connector, cable, and connecting hose arestowed in the compressor housing.

Using the Mobility SystemTo repair a flat tire with the Mobility System,proceed as follows:▷ Filling the tire with sealant▷ Distributing the sealant▷ Correcting the tire inflation pressure

Filling the tire with sealant1. Shake the sealant bottle.2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the

compressor housing and screw it onto thesealant bottle connection. Ensure that theconnection hose is not kinked.

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres‐sor housing in a vertical position.

4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of thenot working wheel and screw the fillinghose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/

socket in the passenger compartment, referto page 101.

7. When the engine is running:

Seite 163

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

163Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 164: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Switch on the compressor and let it run forapprox. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant intothe tire and achieve a tire inflation pressureof approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi.While sealant is being filled, the inflationpressure may intermittently rise to approx.5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com‐pressor in this phase.

8. Switch off the compressor.CAUTIONThe compressor can overheat during ex‐

tended operation. There is risk of propertydamage. Do not run the compressor for morethan 10 min.◀

If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is notreached:

1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheeland drive forward and back approx.33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealantin the tire.

2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is stillnot reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.Contact a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Stowing the Mobility System1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle from the wheel.2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6

from the sealant bottle.3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle with the free connector on the seal‐ant bottle.This prevents left-over sealant from escap‐ing from the bottle.

4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitablematerial to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐cle.

Distributing the sealantDrive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib‐ute the sealant.Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Ifpossible, do not drop below a speed of10 mph/20 km/h.

Correcting the tire inflation pressure1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or

about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca‐tion.

2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com‐pressor directly onto the tire valve.

3. Insert the connector 5 into the powersocket in the passenger compartment.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running:▷ To increase the inflation pressure:

switch on the compressor. To check thecurrently set inflation pressure, switchoff the compressor.

▷ To reduce the inflation pressure: pressthe release button 9.

CAUTIONThe compressor can overheat during ex‐

tended operation. There is risk of propertydamage. Do not run the compressor for morethan 10 min.◀

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, takethe vehicle on another drive, distributing thesealant, refer to page 164. Then repeat steps1 to 4 once.If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is stillnot reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.Contact a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissible speedof 50 mph/80 km/h.Replace the not working tire as soon as possi‐ble and have the wheel balanced.

Seite 164

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 165: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Have the Mobility System refilled.

Snow chainsThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsuse of fine-link snow chains. Certain types offine-link snow chains have been tested by themanufacturer of the vehicle and recommendedas road-safe and suitable.Information regarding suitable snow chains isavailable from a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equippedwith tires of the following size:195/60 R 16 M+SWith ALL4 all-wheel drive: only mount snowchains on the front wheels.Observe the manufacturer's instructions whenmounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speedof 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snowchains are mounted; otherwise, the instrumentmight issue an incorrect reading.Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor ifsnow chains are mounted; otherwise, the in‐strument might issue an incorrect reading.When driving with snow chains, it may be use‐ful to temporarily deactivate DSC or activateDTC, refer to page 84.

Seite 165

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

165Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 166: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Engine compartmentVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number2 Battery, under the cover  1823 Dip stick for engine oil  1684 Engine oil filler neck  168

5 Coolant expansion tank  1706 Engine compartment fuse box  1837 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlight

and window washer system  57

Seite 166

MOBILITY Engine compartment

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 167: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

HoodInformation

WARNINGImproperly executed work in the engine

compartment can damage vehicle componentsand impair vehicle functions. There is a risk ofpersonal and property damage. The manufac‐turer of your vehicle recommends that, in theeffort to avoid such risks, work in the enginecompartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐ice center or another qualified service center orrepair shop.◀

CAUTIONFolded-away wipers can be jammed

when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Make sure that the wipers withthe wiper blades mounted are folded downonto the windshield before opening thehood.◀

Unlocking and opening the hood1. Pull the lever.

2. Lift the hood all the way.

3. Press the release handle and open thehood.

WARNINGThere are protruding parts, e.g. lock

hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk ofinjuries. If the hood is open, pay attention toprotruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀

Closing the hood

Close the hood from a height of ap‐prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must beclearly heard to engage.

WARNINGAn incorrectly locked hood can open

while driving and restrict visibility. There is riskof an accident. Stop immediately and correctlyclose the hood.◀

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed on opening

and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.Make sure that the area of movement of thehood is clear during opening and closing.◀

Seite 167

Engine compartment MOBILITY

167Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 168: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Engine oilEngine oilVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationEngine oil consumption depends on the drivingstyle and the conditions of use. A highly sportydriving style, for example, results in considera‐bly higher engine oil consumption.Therefore, regularly check the engine oil levelafter refueling.

Checking the oil level with a dip stick1. Park the vehicle on level ground when the

engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af‐ter driving continuously for at least6 2 miles/10 km.

2. Switch the engine off.3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip

stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth,paper towel, etc.

4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way intothe measuring tube and pull it out again.

The oil level must be between the twomarks on the dip stick.

The oil quantity between the two marks on thedip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter.Do not exceed the high mark of the dip stick.

Adding engine oil

Filler neck

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 literof oil only after the corresponding message ap‐pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en‐gines, after the oil level is just above the lowmark of the dip stick, refer to page 168.

CAUTIONA too low engine oil level causes engine

damage. There is risk of property damage.Add engine oil within the next30 miles/50 km.◀

Seite 168

MOBILITY Engine oil

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 169: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

CAUTIONToo much engine oil can damage the en‐

gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk ofproperty damage. Do not add too much engineoil. Have excess engine oil suctioned off by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.◀

WARNINGOperating materials, e.g. oils, greases,

coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Observe the instructions on the containers.Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin oreyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐erating materials into different bottles. Storeoperating materials out of reach of children.◀

Engine oil types to add

InformationCAUTIONOil additives can damage the engine.

There is risk of property damage. Do not use oiladditives.◀

CAUTIONIncorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐

tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk ofproperty damage. When selecting an engineoil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐rect viscosity grade.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of theengine.

Viscosity gradesWhen selecting an engine oil, ensure that theengine oil belongs to one of the viscositygrades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, andSAE 5W-30.

Suitable engine oil typesAdd engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐ing standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Further information regarding suitable engineoil ratings and viscosities can be obtained froma dealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Alternative engine oil typesIf an engine oil suitable for continuous use isnot available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐gine oil with the following oil rating can beadded:Gasoline engine

API SL or superior oil rating

Engine oil changeThe vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou let the dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop changethe engine oil.

Seite 169

Engine oil MOBILITY

169Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 170: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

CoolantVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

General informationWARNINGWith the engine hot and the cooling sys‐

tem open, coolant can escape and lead toburns. There is risk of injuries. Only open thecooling system with the engine cooled down.◀

WARNINGAdditives are harmful and incorrect addi‐

tives can damage the engine. There is risk of in‐juries and risk of property damage. Avoid thecontact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes withadditives. Do not swallow any additives. Usesuitable additives only.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Information regardingsuitable additives is available from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Coolant temperatureIf the coolant and therefore the engine over‐heat, a warning lamp lights up, refer topage 194.

Coolant levelChecking1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐

wise slightly to allow any accumulatedpressure to escape; then continue turningto open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is betweenthe markings. The markings are located onthe side of the coolant reservoir.

Refilling1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐

wise slightly to allow any accumulatedpressure to escape, then continue turningto open.

3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool‐ant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

Seite 170

MOBILITY Coolant

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 171: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

4. Twist the cap closed.5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐

nated as soon as possible.

DisposalComply with the appropriate environ‐mental protection regulations when dis‐

posing of coolant additives.

Seite 171

Coolant MOBILITY

171Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 172: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MaintenanceVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

MINI maintenance system

The MINI maintenance system provides infor‐mation on required maintenance measures andthus provides support in maintaining roadsafety and the operational reliability of the ve‐hicle.

Condition Based ServiceCBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the various driving conditions of yourMINI. Based on this, Condition Based Servicedetermines the current and future mainte‐nance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance you need to your userprofile.Detailed information on service requirementscan be displayed in the tachometer, refer topage 66.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control. Thedealer’s service center can read this data outand suggest an optimized maintenance scopefor your vehicle.Therefore, hand the service advisor the remotecontrol with which the vehicle was driven mostrecently.Make sure the date is set correctly; otherwise,the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Serv‐ice is not ensured.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehicle bat‐tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐count.If this occurs, have a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repair shopupdate the time-dependent maintenance pro‐cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, ifnecessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty In‐formation Booklet forUS models and Warrantyand Service Guide Book‐let for Canadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐mation Booklet for US models and Warranty

Seite 172

MOBILITY Maintenance

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 173: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian modelsfor additional information on service require‐ments.The manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthat maintenance and repair be performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop. Records of regu‐lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐tained.

Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnosis

CAUTIONThe socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an

intricate component intended to be used inconjunction with specialized equipment tocheck the vehicle’s primary emissions system.Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐nosis, or contact with the socket for OnboardDiagnosis for other than its intended purpose,can cause vehicle malfunctions and createsrisks of personal and property damage. Giventhe foregoing, the manufacture of your vehiclestrongly recommends that access to the socketfor Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer'sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop or other persons that havethe specialized training and equipment for pur‐poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐board Diagnosis.◀

Primary components in the vehicle emissionscan be checked via the OBD socket using a de‐vice.

EmissionsThe warning lamps light up. The vehicleis producing higher emissions. Furtherdriving at a moderate pace is possible.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Under certain circumstances, one of the lampsflashes or lights up continuously. This indicatesthat there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc‐tion in the engine. In this situation, decreasethe vehicle speed and immediately drive to adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop. Serious enginemisfiring within a brief period can seriouslydamage emission control components, in par‐ticular the catalytic converter. In addition, themechanical engine components may becomedamaged.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight‐ened, the OBD system may concludethat fuel vapor is escaping; this will

cause a display to light up. If the filler cap isthen tightened, the display should go out in afew days.

Seite 173

Maintenance MOBILITY

173Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 174: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Replacing componentsVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Wiper blade replacementGeneral information

CAUTIONIf the wiper arm falls onto the windshield

without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐placing the wiper blades and do not fold downthe wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀

Replacing the front wiper blades1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and

fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Take the wiper blade out of the catchmechanism toward the front.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixationuntil it engages audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.CAUTIONFolded-away wipers can be jammed

when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Make sure that the wipers withthe wiper blades mounted are folded downonto the windshield before opening thehood.◀

Changing the rear wiper bladeMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back, ar‐

row.

Seite 174

MOBILITY Replacing components

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 175: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

3. Press the wiper blade against the stop topush it out of the fixation.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixationuntil it engages audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Lamp and bulb replace‐mentInformation

Lamps and bulbsLamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau‐tion when handling lights and bulbs.The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have the necessary work performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop if you are unfami‐liar with it or it is not described here.A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

WARNINGBulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐

tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There isrisk of injuries. Only change bulbs after theyhave cooled off.◀

WARNINGWork on switched-on lighting systems

can cause short circuits. There is risk of injuriesor risk of property damage. When working onthe lighting system, switch off the lamps inquestion. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐turer's instructions.◀

CAUTIONContaminated bulbs reduce their service

life. There is risk of property damage. Do nothold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a

clean cloth or something similar, or hold thebulb by its base.◀

Caring for the headlights, refer to page 191.For bulb replacement procedures that are notdescribed here, contact a dealer’s service cen‐ter or another qualified service center or repairshop.For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, con‐tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop.

Light-emitting diodes LEDsIn some equipment, the light source is providedby light-emitting diodes behind a cover.These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐tional lasers, are designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

WARNINGToo intensive brightness can irritate or

damage the retina of the eye. There is risk ofinjuries. Do not look directly into the headlightsor other light sources for an extended period oftime. Do not remove the LED covers.◀

Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ternal lights in cool or humid weather. Whenyou drive with the lights switched on, the con‐densation evaporates after a short time. Theheadlight glass does not need to be changed.If despite driving with the lights switched on,increasing humidity forms, e. g. water dropletsin the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehiclerecommends having it checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Bi-xenon headlightsThese bulbs have a very long life and the likeli‐hood of failure is very low, provided that theyare not switched on and off excessively. If abulb should nevertheless fail, you can continue

Seite 175

Replacing components MOBILITY

175Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 176: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

driving cautiously with the front fog lights, pro‐vided this is permitted by local laws.

DANGERThere can be high voltage in the lighting

system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐turer of your vehicle recommends that thework on the lighting system including bulb re‐placement be performed by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

Front lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Headlights

1 Low beams/high-beams2 Turn signal

Lower front lights

1 Parking lights2 Daytime running lights or fog lights

Lower LED front lights

1 Parking lights / daytime running lights2 Fog lights

Halogen low beams and high-beamsH13 bulb, 60/55 watt

Access to the bulbs through the enginecompartmentFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 175.Low beam/high-beam bulbs can be changedfrom the engine compartment.

To remove the cover:

1. Press the tab.2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the

holder.Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover.

Seite 176

MOBILITY Replacing components

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 177: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Replacing the bulb1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1,

and remove it, arrow 2.

2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off theconnector, arrow 2.

3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

LED parking lights/LED fog lights/LEDdaytime running lightsFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 175.Lights are implemented using LED technology.In case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Turn signals/parking lights/roadsideparking lights/fog lights/and daytimerunning lights

Access to the bulbs via the wheel housingFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 175.

1 Turn signal2 Parking lights/roadside parking lights/fog

lights/and daytime running lights

Replacing the turn signal bulb21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 1.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turn

the cover counterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐move it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the coversin reverse order.

Seite 177

Replacing components MOBILITY

177Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 178: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Replacing the parking light bulb androadside parking light bulb5-watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Replacing the front fog light bulbH8 bulb, 35 watt

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Replacing the daytime running light bulbBulb PSX24W

1. Turn the wheel.2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.4. Squeeze the lower bulb at both tabs and

pull out.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Lateral turn signals5-watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Open the hood.

2. Squeeze the clip, arrows, and remove thebulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it to the leftand replace it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover inreverse order.

Seite 178

MOBILITY Replacing components

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 179: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Side marker lightsTo replace these bulbs, contact a dealer’s serv‐ice center or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

Tail lights, bulb replacementFollow the general instructions on lamps andbulbs, refer to page 175.Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W

MINI Countryman

1 Brake/tail light2 Turn signal3 Brake/tail light4 Backup light

MINI Paceman

1 Brake light2 Tail light3 Turn signal4 Backup light

ReplacingAll bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.

MINI Countryman1. Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.2. Open the tailgate.3. Press the cover out of the cargo area side

panel at the rear and remove it.

4. Detach the emergency release of the fuelfiller flap, refer to page 150, and push itaside with the foam insert.Ensure that the emergency release is notdamaged.

5. Disengage the bulb holder by pushingdown the clip, arrow 1.

6. Take out the bulb holder and detach thecable, arrow 2.

7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb whileturning it to the left and remove it.

8. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulbholder in reverse order. Ensure that thebulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Seite 179

Replacing components MOBILITY

179Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 180: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

9. Return the foam insert to its original posi‐tion and reattach the emergency release ofthe fuel filler flap.

10. Reattach the cover.

MINI Paceman1. Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.2. Open the tailgate.3. Remove the cover from the cargo area side

trim.

4. Unlock the fastening elements, arrows 1, byturning.

5. Remove the screws, arrows 2, using the hexkey from the vehicle document portfolio.

6. Remove the tail light.

7. Disengage the bulb holder by pushingdown the clip, arrows 1.

8. Take out the bulb holder and detach thecable, arrow 2.

9. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb whileturning it to the left and remove it.

10. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulbholder in reverse order. Ensure that thebulb holder engages in all fasteners.

License plate lights5-watt bulb, C 5 W

Replacing

MINI Countryman1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the

light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐row 1.

2. Take out the light, arrow 2.3. Replace the bulb.4. Insert the light.

Seite 180

MOBILITY Replacing components

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 181: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Paceman1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the

light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐row 1.

2. Take out the light, arrow 2.3. Replace the bulb.4. Insert the light.

Center brake lightThis light uses LED technology for operation. Incase of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.

Changing wheelsInformationThe vehicle may be equipped with conven‐tional tires with the Mobility System, refer topage 162, or with run-flat tires, refer topage 162.No spare tire is available in the case of a flattire.The suitable tools for changing wheels areavailable as accessories from a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.

Safety measures▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible from

passing traffic and on solid ground. Switchon the hazard warning system.

▷ Set the parking brake and move the selec‐tor lever to position P.

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out‐side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazardwarning lamp is required, set it up on theroadside at an appropriate distance fromthe rear of the vehicle.

▷ Change the wheel only on a level, firm sur‐face which is not slippery. The vehicle orthe jack could slip to the side if you attemptto raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery sur‐face such as snow, ice, tiles, etc.

▷ Do not use a wooden block or similar objectas a support base for the jack, as this wouldprevent it from extending to its full supportheight and reduce its load-carrying ca‐pacity.

▷ To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie un‐der the vehicle, and never start the enginewhile it is supported by the jack.

Jacking points for the vehicle jackMINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Seite 181

Replacing components MOBILITY

181Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 182: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated in the positions shown.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem‐perate climate conditions.A dealer’s service center will be glad to answerany questions you may have.

Battery replacementCAUTIONVehicle batteries that are not compatible

can damage vehicle systems and impair vehiclefunctions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that arecompatible with your vehicle type should be in‐stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’sservice center.◀

After a battery replacement, the manufacturerof your vehicle recommends that the vehiclebattery be registered on the vehicle by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop to ensure that allcomfort features are fully available and thatany Check Control messages of these comfortfeatures are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

InformationCAUTIONBattery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12V on-board networkcan be overloaded or damaged. There is risk ofproperty damage. Only connect battery charg‐ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aidterminals in the engine compartment.◀

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when theengine is switched off. Connections, refer topage 184.

General informationEnsure that the battery is sufficiently charged toachieve the full battery life.It may be necessary to charge the battery inthe following cases:▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to

travel short distances.▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for

more than one month.

Power failureAfter a temporary power failure, some equip‐ment will be restricted in its use and will needto be reinitialized. In addition, certain individualsettings will be lost and must be updated:▷ Time and date: the values must be up‐

dated, refer to page 65.▷ Radio: the stations need to be stored again,

refer to page 128.▷ Glass sunroof, electrical: it may only be pos‐

sible to tilt the roof. The system needs to beinitialized. Contact a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 182

MOBILITY Replacing components

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 183: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Disposing of old batteriesAfter they are replaced, have old bat‐teries disposed of by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service cen‐

ter or repair shop or take them to a collectionpoint.Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesWARNINGIncorrect and repaired fuses can overload

electrical lines and components. There is risk offire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse anddo not replace a nonworking fuse with a substi‐tute of another color or amperage rating.◀

Have the fuses replaced by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.Information on the fuses can be found on theinside of the covers.

In the engine compartment

Opening the coverPress the snap lock.

In interior

On the right side of the footwell.

Opening the coverPush out at the recess.

Seite 183

Replacing components MOBILITY

183Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 184: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Breakdown assistanceVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Hazard warning flash‐ers

The button is located on the speedometer.

Warning triangle

Under the loading edge in the cargo area.

To remove, open the two fasteners.

First aid kitSome of the articles contained in the first aid kithave a limited service life. Therefore, check theuse-by dates of the contents regularly and re‐place the items before they expire.

The first aid kit is located in the left side trim onthe cargo area floor or under the loading floor.

Roadside AssistanceService availabilityRoadside Assistance can be reached around theclock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐down.

Roadside AssistanceA phone number for Roadside Assistance canbe displayed, refer to page 144, via the radio.

Jump-startingInformationIf the battery is discharged, the engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicle and

Seite 184

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 185: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

two jumper cables. In the same way, you canhelp jump-start another vehicle. Only usejumper cables with fully insulated clamp han‐dles.To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.

DANGERContact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. Do not touch any componentsthat are under voltage.◀

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐formation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

CAUTIONIn the case of body contact between the

two vehicles, a short circuit can occur duringjump-starting. There is risk of property damage.Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀

Connecting jumper cablesWARNINGIf the jumper cables are connected in the

incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the cor‐rect order during connection.◀

1. Open the battery cover in the engine com‐partment to access the positive terminal.

2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminalcover on the left and right, arrows 1, andraise the cover, arrow 2.

3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positivejumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery or to a starting aid terminal of thevehicle providing assistance.

4. Attach the second clamp of the positivejumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery of the vehicle to be started.

5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the corresponding engine

Seite 185

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

185Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 186: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐sistance.

6. Attach the second clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the engine or bodyground of the vehicle to be started.

Body ground:

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle andlet it run for several minutes at a slightly in‐creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being startedin the usual way.If the first starting attempt is not successful,wait a few minutes before making anotherattempt in order to allow the dischargedbattery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order.Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towingInformation

WarningThere is an increased danger of accidents

when towing vehicles. There is a risk of per‐sonal injury. Do not transport any passengers

other than the driver in a vehicle that is beingtowed.◀

Using a tow fittingThe screw-in tow fitting must always be carriedin the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the frontor rear of the MINI.The tow fitting is stowed in the following loca‐tion, depending on the equipment:▷ Under the right or left front seat.▷ In the pouch of the wheel change set in the

cargo area.CAUTIONIf the tow fitting is not used as intended,

there can be damage to the vehicle or to thetow fitting. There is risk of property damage.Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀

Use of the tow fitting:▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the

vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Access to the screw threadPush out the tow fitting cover at the appropri‐ate recess in the bumper.

Front

Seite 186

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 187: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Rear

Being towedAdhere to the following information:▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;

otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turnsignals, and windshield wipers may be un‐available.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axletilted, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐quired.

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

Manual transmissionGearshift lever in neutral position.

Steptronic transmissionCAUTIONThe vehicle can be damaged when tow‐

ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There isrisk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐ing platform.◀

Towing with a tow barWARNINGIf the approved gross vehicle weight of

the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle tobe towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it willnot be possible to control the vehicle's re‐sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make surethat the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀

CAUTIONIf the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐

correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctlyattach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐ting.◀

The tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is attached offset.

Towing with a tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make surethat the tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresses onthe vehicle components when towing, alwaysuse nylon ropes or nylon straps.

CAUTIONIf the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐

correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctlyattach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐ting.◀

Seite 187

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

187Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 188: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

With a tow truck: vehicles without ALL4all-wheel drive

CAUTIONWhen lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting

or body and chassis parts; damage can occuron vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Have the vehicle transported with a tow truckwith a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

With a tow truck: vehicle with ALL4 all-wheel drive

CAUTIONWhen lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting

or body and chassis parts; damage can occuron vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀

CAUTIONThe vehicle can be damaged when tow‐

ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There isrisk of property damage. Only transport the ve‐hicle on a flat-bed.◀

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Only transport the vehicle on a flat-bed.

Tow-startingIf possible, start the engine by jump-starting,refer to page 184, it rather than tow-startingthe vehicle. Vehicles with a catalytic convertershould only be tow-started when the engine iscold; vehicles with an automatic transmissioncannot be tow-started.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system andcomply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.3. Engage third gear.4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch is depressed and then slowly release

Seite 188

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 189: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi‐ately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the towbar or rope, and switch off the hazardwarning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 189

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

189Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 190: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

CareVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

Car washesGeneral informationWash your vehicle frequently, particularly inwinter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐age the vehicle.

InformationCAUTIONWhen cleaning with high-pressure wash‐

ers, components can be damaged due to thepressure or temperatures being too high. Thereis risk of property damage. Maintain sufficientdistance and do not spray too long continu‐ously. Follow the operating instructions for thehigh-pressure washer.◀

Do not direct steam or high-pressure washerstoward the labels applied by the manufacturer;otherwise, damage may result.

Distances and temperature▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,

seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking actioncan be reduced and corrosion of the brakediscs can occur.Regularly remove foreign bodies, such asleaves, from the area of the windshield whenthe hood is open.

Washing in automatic car washesGive preference to cloth car washes or thosethat use soft brushes in order to avoid paintdamage.Do not use automatic high-pressure washers;otherwise, water may drip into the interior inthe area of the windows.Before driving into the car wash, check whetherthe system is suitable for your MINI. Note thefollowing points:▷ Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 208.▷ If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re‐

fer to page 42.▷ Maximum permissible tire width.

CAUTIONToo high guide rails in car washes can

damage body parts. There is risk of propertydamage. Avoid car washes with guide railshigher than 4 in/10 cm.◀

Preparations before driving into the car wash:▷ Unscrew the road antenna.▷ Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin‐

tentional wiper activation.▷ Deactivate the rear window wiper and pro‐

tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper‐ator about any suitable protective meas‐ures.

▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, ifthere is a risk that these may be damaged.

Seite 190

MOBILITY Care

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 191: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

▷ Insert the remote control into the ignitionlock.

Steptronic transmissionBefore driving into the car wash, note the fol‐lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignitionlock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Move the selector lever to position N.3. Release the parking brake.4. Switch the engine off.5. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Hand car washIf washing the vehicle by hand, use copiousquantities of water and car shampoo if neces‐sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or awashing brush by applying gentle pressure.Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate therain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐tion or switch off the ignition.

Adhere to the local regulations regardingwashing cars by hand.

HeadlightsDo not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus‐tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled,e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse offwith copious quantities of water.Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use anice scraper.

WindowsClean the outside and inside surfaces of thewindows and the mirror glasses with windowcleaner.Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain‐ing quartz.

Wiper bladesClean with soapy water and replace regularly toavoid streaking.Wax and preservative residue and soiling onthe windows cause streaking during windowwiping and lead to premature wear on thewiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen‐sor.

Vehicle careCar care productsRegular cleaning and care contributes signifi‐cantly to vehicle value retention.The manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsusing car care and cleaning products fromMINI.

WARNINGCleansers can contain substances that are

dangerous and harmful to your health. There isrisk of injuries. When cleaning the interior, openthe doors or windows. Only use products in‐tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instruc‐tions on the container.◀

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to vehicle value reten‐tion and protects the paintwork against thelong-term effects of paint-damaging substan‐ces.Environmental influences in areas with higherair pollution or natural contaminants, such astree resin or pollen, can have an impact on thevehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailorthe frequency and extent of your car care tothese influences.Immediately remove especially aggressive sub‐stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or birddroppings, to prevent damage to the paint‐work.

Seite 191

Care MOBILITY

191Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 192: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Correcting paint damageDepending on the severity of the damage, re‐pair stone impact damage or scratches imme‐diately to prevent rust formation.The manufacturer recommends having paintdamage corrected with a professional repairpaint job according to factory specifications us‐ing original MINI paint materials.

PreservationPreservation is needed when water no longerbeads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only usepaint preservation products that contain car‐nauba or synthetic waxes.

Caring for matte finishesOnly use cleaning and care products suitablefor vehicles with matte finish. These are availa‐ble from a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Leather careThe leather processed by the manufacturer is ahigh quality natural product. Light graininess isa typical feature of natural leather.Particles of dust and road grime chafe in poresand folds, and lead to increased wear and pre‐mature degradation of the leather surface.Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu‐larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.Make especially sure that light-colored leatheris cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible tosoiling.Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo‐tion as dirt and grease will attack the protectivelayer of the leather.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re‐move superficial soiling.In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains,use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in

combination with a suitable interior cleaner.Follow the instructions on the container.Clean the upholstery material down to theseams using large sweeping motions. Avoidrubbing the material vigorously.

CAUTIONOpen Velcro® fasteners on articles of

clothing can damage the seat covers. There isrisk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐cro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Interior plastic partsThese include:▷ Imitation leather surfaces▷ Lamp lenses▷ Indicator covers▷ Matte componentsClean with water and a solvent-free plasticcleaner if necessary.

Rubber sealsOnly treat with water or a rubber care product.When cleaning rubber seals, do not use siliconesprays or other care products containing sili‐cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the radia‐tor grille or door handles with an ample supplyof water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt. For additional treatment, use a chromepolish.

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, onlyuse a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH valueof 5 to 9.

Seite 192

MOBILITY Care

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 193: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot‐ter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, damage mayresult. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions.Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de‐stroy the protective coating of neighboringcomponents such as the brake disc.

Exterior sensorsThe sensors on the outside of the vehicle, suchas for Park Distance Control, must be kept cleanand free of ice to ensure that they remain fullyfunctional.

Decorative trimClean decorative trims and fine wood compo‐nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with asoft cloth.

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

WARNINGChemical cleansers can destroy the safety

belt webbing. Missing protective effect of thesafety belts. There is risk of injuries or danger tolife. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaningthe safety belts.◀

Carpets/floor matsWARNINGObjects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in thevehicle such that they are secured and cannotenter into the driver's floor area. Use floor matsthat are suitable for the vehicle and can besafely attached to the floor. Do not use loosefloor mats and do not layer several floor mats.Make sure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐curely fastened again after they were removed,e.g. for cleaning.◀

Floor mats can be removed for cleaning.

If they are very dirty, clean with a microfibercloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre‐vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forthin the direction of travel only.

DisplaysTo clean the displays, such as the radio or dis‐play elements, use an antistatic microfibercloth.

CAUTIONChemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of

any kind can damage the surface of displaysand screens. There is risk of property damage.Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀

CD/DVD drivesCAUTIONThe use of cleaning CDs may damage

parts of the drive. There is risk of property dam‐age. Do not use cleaning CDs.◀

Long-term vehicle storageA dealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop can advise you onwhat to consider when storing the vehicle forlonger than three months.

Seite 193

Care MOBILITY

193Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 194: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Indicator/warning lampsVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

OverviewThe indicator and warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors in displayarea 1 or 2. The table contains information oncauses and how to respond. Note whether alamp lights up alone or in combination with an‐other. Some lights can light up in different col‐ors. Corresponding distinctions are made in thetext.

1 2 Cause How to respond

Turn signal

The high-beams/headlight flasher areswitched on.

The front fog lamps are switched on.

The rear fog lights are switched on.

Fasten safety belts. Fasten safety belt, refer to page 41.

External temperature warning Drive conservatively, refer topage 61.

Seite 194

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 195: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up briefly:Approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters of fuel remain inthe tank.Remains on:The remaining range is no more than30 miles/50 km, refer to page 62.

The engine refuses to start. Depress the brake or clutch to startthe engine, refer to page 51.

The ignition is switched on and driver's dooris open.

Switch off the ignition, refer topage 50, or close the driver's door.

The lights are still switched on. Switch off the lights, refer topage 69.

The roadside parking lamps are still on. Switch off the roadside parkinglights, refer to page 70.

A door is open.

The hood is open.

The tailgate is open.

The fuel cap is missing or loose. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor‐rectly positioned and close it until itclicks audibly. Do not jam the strapbetween the fuel cap and the vehi‐cle.

The windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid, refer to page 56,as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.Check the service requirements, re‐fer to page 172.

Seite 195

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

195Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 196: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up in yellow:

The engine will start the next time the Start/Stop button is touched, possibly without thebrake or clutch being depressed.

The remote control is malfunctioning or, incars with Comfort Access, was not detected.

The engine cannot be started. Havethe remote control checked, if nec‐essary.

The battery in the remote control is dis‐charged.

Use the remote control for a longerjourney or, in cars with Comfort Ac‐cess, replace the battery.

The belt tensioners and/or airbag systemhas failed.

Have the system checked immedi‐ately.Fasten the safety belts anyway.

Steering assistance has failed. You can continue your journey, butmoderate your speed and exercisedue caution. Markedly differentsteering response. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

Engine malfunction Stop the car and switch off the en‐gine. You cannot continue yourjourney. Contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Lights up in yellow:

Full engine power is no longer available. Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the enginechecked as soon as possible.

Indicator lamp 1 flashes:

Engine malfunction under high load. Highengine load will result in damage to the cat‐alytic converter.

Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the vehiclechecked immediately.

Indicator lamp 1 lights up:

Seite 196

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 197: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Engine malfunction with adverse effect onemissions.

Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

The engine is overheating. Carefully bring the car to a stop,switch off the engine and allow it tocool down. Do not open the hood;otherwise, there would be a risk ofinjury due to scalding. Contact adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repairshop.

Lights up in yellow:

The engine is too hot. Continue driving at more moderatespeed so that the engine can cooldown. Have the engine checkedwithout delay if the situation reoc‐curs.

Lights up in red:

Battery is no longer being charged. Alterna‐tor malfunction.

Switch off all unnecessary electricalconsumers. Have the power supplysystem checked without delay.

Lights up in yellow:

The battery charge level is very low, the bat‐tery is old or is not securely connected.

Charge the battery by taking a longdrive or using an external charger.If necessary, switch off automaticpower consumers. Have the batterychecked as soon as possible.

Indication in US modelsThe parking brake is set.

Indication in Canadian modelsThe parking brake is set.

Seite 197

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

197Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 198: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indication in US modelsThe parking brake is set while driving.

Release the parking brake.

Indication in Canadian modelsThe parking brake is set while driving.

Release the parking brake.

Indication in US models

Lights up in red:The brake fluid level is too low.

Reduced braking effect, stop thecar carefully. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Indication in Canadian models

Lights up in red:The brake fluid level is too low.

Reduced braking effect, stop thecar carefully. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Indication in US models.

Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brakepads checked without delay.

Indication in Canadian models

Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brakepads checked without delay.

Indication in US models

Seite 198

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 199: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.Contact a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center orrepair shop.

Indication in Canadian models

The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.Contact a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center orrepair shop.

Lights up in red: Have the system in questionchecked immediately.

The starter has failed or The engine cannot be restarted.

Ignition malfunctioning. The engine canonly be restarted when the brake is de‐pressed orLighting system failed. Low beams/tail lightsand brake lights still operational. All otherlights failed.

Depress the brake to restart the en‐gine.

Lights up in yellow:

Brake light control failed orThe fuel supply is malfunctioning.

Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the system inquestion checked immediately.

Drive malfunctioning. Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Transmission limp-home program with reduced accel‐eration is active. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Flashing:Dynamic Stability Control DSC or DynamicTraction Control DTC is controlling drive andbraking forces, refer to page 84.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated,refer to page 85.

Seite 199

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

199Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 200: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Dynamic Stability Control DSC and DynamicTraction Control DTC are deactivated, referto page 84.

Driving stability limited during ac‐celeration and cornering.Driving style must be readjusted.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC and DynamicTraction Control DTC failed.

Driving stability limited during ac‐celeration and cornering.Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

ALL4 all-wheel drive failed. It is possible to continue driving.Drive cautiously and defensively.Avoid operating on poor roads andusing the full throttle and kickdownpositions of the accelerator. Havethe system checked immediately.

ALL4 all-wheel drive and DSC failed. It is possible to continue driving.Drive cautiously and defensively.Avoid operating on poor roads andusing the full throttle and kickdownpositions of the accelerator. Havethe system checked immediately.

Indication in US models

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS and the Tire Pressure Monitor dis‐play have failed, refer to page 84.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and use offull throttle and kickdown positionsof the accelerator. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Indication in US models

Seite 200

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 201: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the TirePressure Monitor display have failed, referto page 84.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and use offull throttle and kickdown positionsof the accelerator. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Indication in Canadian models

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS and the Flat Tire Monitor or the TirePressure Monitor have failed, refer topage 84.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and use offull throttle and kickdown positionsof the accelerator. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Indication in Canadian models

The driving stability control systems includ‐ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the FlatTire Monitor or the Tire Pressure Monitorhave failed, refer to page 84.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐sively. Avoid full brake application,operation on poor roads, and use offull throttle and kickdown positionsof the accelerator. Have the systemchecked immediately.

In vehicles with the Flat Tire Monitor

Light up in yellow and red:

A tire is deflated. Stop carefully. Additional informa‐tion, refer to page 77.

The Flat Tire Monitor was not initialized. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, referto page 77.

Seite 201

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

201Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 202: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Light up in yellow:

Flat Tire Monitor failed. Punctures are notindicated.

Have the system checked.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

Light up in yellow and red:

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tirepressure.

Stop carefully. Additional informa‐tion, refer to page 79.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

Light up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor not initialized. Check the inflation pressure and re‐set the system, refer to page 79.

The small light flashes yellow and then stayson, the large light lights up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures arenot indicated.

Have the system checked.

A wheel without TPM electronics ismounted.

Have the system checked.

TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due toother systems or devices using the sameradio frequency.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

The small light flashes yellow and then stayson, the large light lights up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures arenot indicated.

Have the system checked.

A wheel without TPM electronics ismounted.

Have the system checked.

Lights up in red:

Seite 202

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 203: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

Transmission limp-home program activewith restricted range of gears, possibly withreduced acceleration.

Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the systemchecked immediately.

Gears can be engaged without depressingthe brake.

Always depress the brake to en‐gage a gear.

Automatic selector lever locked: Manually unlock the selector leverlock, refer to page 59.

Lights up in yellow: Have the system checked as soonas possible.

Automatic selector lever locked:The selector lever is locked in position Pwith the engine running or the ignitionswitched on and the brake depressed or

Manually unlock the selector leverlock, refer to page 59.

The brake signal is malfunctioning: a gearcan be engaged without depressing thebrake.

To engage a gear while the vehicleis at a standstill, always depress thebrake. Before leaving the vehicle,move the selector lever to positionP and switch off the engine.

Lights up in red:

The transmission is overheating. Bring the car to a stop and movethe selector lever to position P. Al‐low the transmission to cool down.Further driving at a moderate paceis possible. Have the systemchecked if the situation reoccurs.

Lights up in yellow:

The transmission is too hot. Avoid high engine loads. Furtherdriving at a moderate pace is possi‐ble.

Selector lever position P not engaged. Thevehicle is not secured against rolling.

Selector lever position P not engaged. Theignition cannot be switched off.

Engage selector lever position Pwhen you wish to switch off the ig‐nition, refer to page 50.

Seite 203

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

203Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 204: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

The cruise control system has failed. Have the system checked.

The Park Distance Control has failed. Have the system checked.

A bulb of the exterior lighting system hasfailed.

Have the exterior lighting checkedas soon as possible.

A low-beam headlight or front fog light hasfailed.

Have the lights checked as soon aspossible.

A high-beam headlight has failed. Have the high-beam headlightschecked.

A rear fog light has failed. Have the rear fog lights checked.

The headlight beam throw adjustment hasfailed.

Have the headlight beam throw ad‐justment system checked.

The Adaptive Light Control has failed.

The engine oil pressure is too low. Stop immediately and switch offthe engine. You cannot continueyour journey. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Lights up in red:

The service appointment is overdue. Arrange a service appointment.Check the service requirements, re‐fer to page 66.

Lights up in yellow:

Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.Check the service requirements, re‐fer to page 66.

Seite 204

MOBILITY Indicator/warning lamps

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 205: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

1 2 Cause How to respond

No service due.

The set speed limit was exceeded.

The time and date are no longer correct. Set the time and date, refer topage 65.

Seite 205

Indicator/warning lamps MOBILITY

205Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 206: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 207: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 208: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Technical dataVehicle features and op‐tionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions and sys‐tems.When using the features and systems describedhere, adhere to local regulations.

InformationThe technical data and specifications in thisOwner's Manual are used as guidance values.The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, country version or country-specificmeasurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents or on labelson the vehicle, or can be obtained from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.The information in the vehicle documents al‐ways has priority.

DimensionsThe dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-specificmeasurement method.The specified heights do not take into accountattached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Countryman

MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789

Height inches/mm 61.7/1,566 61.7/1,566 61.4/1,560

LengthWith aerodynamic bumper

inches/mminches/mm

161.7/4,107-

162.2/4,119163.2/4,144

163.1/4,143

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

Seite 208

REFERENCE Technical data

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 209: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

MINI Paceman

MINI Paceman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786

Height inches/mm 60.4/1,533 60.4/1,533 60.1/1,527

LengthWith aerodynamic bumper

inches/mminches/mm

162.2/4,119-

162.4/4,124162.8/4,134

162.8/4,134

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

WeightsNever exceed either the approved axle loads orthe gross vehicle weight.

MINI Countryman

Cooper Cooper S

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751 3,990/1,810

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,925/1,780 4,035/1,830

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,060/934 2,145/973

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964 2,200/998

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,920/871 1,920/871

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,100/1,860 4,155/1,885

Seite 209

Technical data REFERENCE

209Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 210: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,210/1,002 2,210/1,002

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,260/1,025 2,260/1,025

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914 2,070/939

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170

MINI Paceman

Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4 John CooperWorks

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860 4,150/1,882

Steptronic transmis‐sion

lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989 2,200/998

Steptronic transmis‐sion

lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007 2,240/1,016

Approved rear axleload

lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916 2,060/934

Approved roof load ca‐pacity

lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

13.9-40.7/330–1,080

Seite 210

REFERENCE Technical data

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 211: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 12.4/47 Fuel quality, refer topage 152

Seite 211

Technical data REFERENCE

211Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 212: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 84 Acoustic signal, refer to Check

Control 67 Activated charcoal filter with

automatic climate con‐trol 95

Adaptive Light Control 71 Additives, engine oil 169 Airbags 74 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 77 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated air mode, air condi‐tioner 92

Air circulation, refer to Recir‐culated air mode, automaticclimate control 94

Air conditioning 91 Air conditioning mode, air

conditioner 91 Air conditioning mode, auto‐

matic climate control 93 Air distribution, air condi‐

tioner, manual 92 Air distribution, automatic 94 Air distribution, automatic cli‐

mate control, manual 94 Air distribution, individual 92 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 95 Air flow rate for air condi‐

tioner 91 Air flow rate with automatic

climate control 94 Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐

tion pressure 154 Air supply, air conditioner 91

Air supply, automatic climatecontrol 93

Alarm system 30 Alarm system, avoiding unin‐

tentional alarms 32 Alarm system, ending an

alarm 31 Alarm system, interior motion

sensor 32 Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐

sor 31 ALL4 all-wheel system 86 All-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 86 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 97 Ambient lighting 73 Antifreeze, washer fluid 56 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 84 Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐

namic Stability ControlDSC 84

Anti-theft protection 21 Approved engine oils 169 Ashtray 100 Assistance, roadside 184 Assistance when driving off,

refer to Hill drive-off assis‐tant 86

Assistance with starting en‐gine, refer to Jump-start‐ing 184

Automatic air distribution 94 Automatic air flow 94 Automatic car wash 190 Automatic climate control 93 Automatic climate control, au‐

tomatic air distribution 94 Automatic, cruise control 88

Automatic headlight con‐trol 69

Automatic transmission withSteptronic 57

AUTO program with auto‐matic climate control 94

AUX-IN port 132 Average fuel consumption 63 Average fuel consumption,

setting the unit 64 Average speed 63 Average speed, refer to Com‐

puter 62

BBackrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 37 Backrests, refer to Seats 36 Backup lights, bulb replace‐

ment 179 Battery disposal 30 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐

tery 182 Battery, remote control 20 Battery replacement, remote

control 30 Belts, refer to Safety belts 38 Belt tensioners, refer to Safety

belts 38 Bi-xenon headlights 175 Brake assistant 84 Brake discs, breaking in 112 Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐

quirements 66 Brake force distribution, elec‐

tronic 84 Brake pads, breaking in 112 Brake, refer to Parking

brake 52

Seite 212

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 213: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Brakes, MINI maintenancesystem 172

Brakes, service require‐ments 66

Brake system, MINI mainte‐nance system 172

Braking, notes 113 Braking, parking brake 52 Breakdown assistance, Road‐

side Assistance 184 Breaking in 112 Buckle tongues height adjust‐

ment 39 Button for starting the engine,

refer to Start/Stop button 50

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 7 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 182 Car care products 191 Care, displays 193 Care, vehicle 191 Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐

cess 29 Cargo area door, refer to Tail‐

gate 27 Cargo area, enlarging, cargo

cover 102 Cargo area, flat loading

floor 104 Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐

rior lights 72 Cargo area, multi-function

hook 105 Cargo area, opening from the

outside 27 Cargo area, partition net 104 Car horn, refer to Horn 12 Carpet, care 193 Car phone, refer to Tele‐

phone 138 Car wash 190

CBC, Cornering Brake Con‐trol 84

CBS Condition Based Serv‐ice 172

CD/DVD drives, care 193 Center armrest 107 Center console, refer to

Around the center con‐sole 15

Center rail 107 Center rail, refer to Storage

compartments 107 Central locking, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Central locking from the in‐

side 25 Central locking system, con‐

cept 21 Central locking system, from

the outside 21 Changes, technical, refer to

Own Safety 6 Changing wheels/tires 160 Check Control 67 Children, transporting 45 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 47 Child restraint fixing sys‐

tems 45 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 46 Child seat, mounting 46 Child seats, refer to Transport‐

ing children safely 45 Chrome parts, care 192 Circulation of air, refer to Re‐

circulated air mode, air con‐ditioner 92

Circulation of air, refer to Re‐circulated air mode, auto‐matic climate control 94

Cleaning, displays 193 Cleaning, refer to Care 190 Climate 91 Climate mode, ventilation 95 Clock 61

Clock, 12h/24h mode 64 Closing from the inside 25 Closing from the outside 22 Clutch, breaking in 112 Cockpit 12 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 51 Combination instrument, refer

to Displays 14 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signal/high-beams/headlight flasher 53

Combination switch, refer toWasher/wiper system 54

Comfort Access 28 Comfort Access, in the car

wash 29 Comfort Access, replacing the

battery 30 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 15 Compartment for remote con‐

trol, refer to Ignition lock 50 Compass, digital 98 Computer 62 Computer, displaying informa‐

tion 62 Condition Based Service

CBS 172 Confirmation signals for vehi‐

cle locking/unlocking 23 Consumption, refer to Aver‐

age fuel consumption 63 Control Display, care 193 Controls and displays 12 Control systems, driving stabil‐

ity 84 Convenient operation, win‐

dow 23 Coolant temperature 62 Cooling function, switching on

and off 95 Cooling, maximum 94 Cornering Brake Control,

CBC 84 Corrosion on brake discs 114

Seite 213

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

213Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 214: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Cradle for telephone or mobilephone, refer to Snap-inadapter 145

Cruise control 88 Cupholders 100 Current fuel consumption 63 Curve lights, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 71

DDashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 72 Dashboard, refer to Cock‐

pit 12 Dashboard, refer to Dis‐

plays 14 Date, display format 64 Date, setting 65 Daytime running lights 70 Decorative trim, care 193 Defogging windows 92 Defroster, rear window, auto‐

matic climate control 95 Defroster, rear window, with

air conditioner 92 Defrosting windows 92 Defrost setting, refer to De‐

frosting windows 92 Digital compass 98 Dip stick, engine oil 168 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 53 Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 72 Displays 14 Displays and controls 12 Displays, care 193 Displays, cleaning 193 Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 14 Disposal, remote control bat‐

tery 30 Distance warning, refer to

Park Distance ControlPDC 90

Door key, refer to Remotecontrol with integratedkey 20

Door lock 25 Door lock, confirmation sig‐

nals 23 Doors, manual operation 25 Doors, unlocking and locking,

confirmation signals 23 Doors, unlocking and locking

from the inside 25 Doors, unlocking and locking,

from the outside 22 DOT Quality Grades 158 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 86 Driving notes, breaking

in 112 Driving off on hills, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 86 Driving on poor roads 114 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 84 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 112 Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐

tion 95 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 84 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 85 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 84 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 85

EElectrical malfunction, door

lock 25 Electrical malfunction, fuel

filler flap 150 Electronic brake-force distri‐

bution 84

Electronic Stability ProgramESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐ity Control DSC 84

Emergency operation, fuelfiller flap, unlocking man‐ually 150

Emergency operation, refer toManual operation 25

Emergency operation, Step‐tronic transmission, refer toSelector lever lock, overrid‐ing 59

Energy, saving, refer to Savingfuel 120

Engine, breaking in 112 Engine compartment 166 Engine oil, adding 168 Engine oil, additives, refer to

Approved engine oils 169 Engine oil, alternative oil

types 169 Engine oil change intervals,

refer to Service require‐ments 66

Engine oil, dip stick 168 Engine oil, filling capacity 211 Engine oil, MINI maintenance

system 172 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 169 Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 169 Engine, overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 62 Engine start, assistance 184 Engine, starting 51 Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Engine, starting, Start/Stop

button 50 Engine, stopping, Start/Stop

button 50 Engine, switching off 52 Equipment, interior 96

Seite 214

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 215: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐bility Control DSC 84

Exchanging wheels/tires 160 Exterior mirrors 42 Exterior mirrors, adjusting 42 Exterior mirrors, folding in and

out 43 Exterior sensors, care 193 External temperature dis‐

play 61 External temperature display,

changing the unit 64 External temperature warn‐

ing 61

FFailure messages, refer to

Check Control 67 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 32 Fan, refer to Air flow rate for

air conditioner 91 Fan, refer to Air flow rate with

automatic climate con‐trol 94

Fastening safety belts, refer toSafety belts 38

Fault messages, refer to CheckControl 67

Filling capacities 211 Filter, refer to Activated-char‐

coal filter 93 Filter, refer to Microfilter 93 Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐

vated-charcoal filter with au‐tomatic climate control 95

First aid kit 184 First aid, refer to First aid

kit 184 Flashing when locking/unlock‐

ing 23 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor 78 Flat tire, indicator/warning

lamp 78

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 77 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, flat tire

message 78 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, initializ‐

ing the system 78 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow

chains 77 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, system

limits 77 Flat tire, run-flat tire 79 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 79 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 79 Flat tire, wheel change 181 Floor mats, care 193 Fog lights 72 Foot brake 113 Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐

rior lights 72 Four-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 86 Front airbags 74 Front fog light, bulb replace‐

ment 177 Front fog lights 72 Front lights, bulb replace‐

ment 176 Front passenger airbags, de‐

activating 75 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 77 Fuel 152 Fuel, additives 152 Fuel, average consump‐

tion 63 Fuel cap, closing 150 Fuel consumption display,

average fuel consump‐tion 63

Fuel filler flap, closing 150 Fuel filler flap, opening 150 Fuel filler flap, unlocking in

case of an electrical malfunc‐tion 150

Fuel gauge 62

Fuel, refer to Average fuelconsumption 63

Fuel, saving 120 Fuel tank capacity, refer to

Filling capacities 211 Fuel tank contents, refer to

Filling capacities 211 Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐

pacities 211 Fuse 183

GGarage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remotecontrol 96

Gasoline 152 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 62 Gear change, manual trans‐

mission 57 Gear change, Steptronic trans‐

mission 58 Gear display, Steptronic trans‐

mission 57 Glare protection 98 Glass sunroof, electrical 32 Glass sunroof, electrical, open‐

ing/closing 33 Glass sunroof, electrical, rais‐

ing 32 Glass sunroof, electric, con‐

venient operation 23 Glass sunroof, electric, remote

control 23

HHalogen headlights, bulb re‐

placement 176 Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 52 Hand car wash, care 191 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 97 Hands-free system 15

Seite 215

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

215Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 216: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Hazard warning system 15 Head airbags 74 Headlamp control, refer to

Parking lamps/lowbeams 69

Headlamps, care 191 Headlight control, auto‐

matic 69 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 71 Headlight flasher 53 Headlights 69 Headlights, cleaning, washer

fluid 57 Head restraints 41 Head restraints, adjusting the

height 41 Head restraints, removing 42 Heatable rear window, air

conditioner 92 Heatable windshield 95 Heating, rear window with au‐

tomatic climate control 95 Heating, seats 38 Heating, windshield 95 Height adjustment, seats 36 High-beams 70 High beams, bulb replace‐

ment 176 Hill drive-off assistant 86 Hills 114 Holder for remote control, re‐

fer to Ignition lock 50 Homepage 6 Hood 167 Hood, closing 167 Hood, opening 167 Hood, unlocking 167 Horn 12 Hydraulic brake assistant 84

IIce warning, refer to External

temperature warning 61

Icy roads, refer to Externaltemperature warning 61

Identification marks, run-flattires 162

Identification marks, tires 158 Ignition 50 Ignition key position 1, refer

to Radio ready state 50 Ignition key position 2, refer

to Ignition on 50 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control with integratedkey 20

Ignition lock 50 Ignition, switched off 51 Ignition, switched on 50 Indicator and warning lamps,

overview 194 Indicator and warning lamps,

Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 80

Indicator and warninglights 15

Individual air distribution 92 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐

fer to Flat Tire Monitor 77 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐

fer to Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 79

Inflation pressure, refer to Tireinflation pressure 154

Initializing, compass, refer toCalibrating 99

Initializing, Flat Tire MonitorFTM 78

Initializing, glass sunroof,electrical 33

Instrument cluster, refer toDisplays 14

Instrument lighting 72 Instruments, refer to Cock‐

pit 12 Integrated key 20 Integrated universal remote

control 96 Interior equipment 96

Interior lights 72 Interior lights, remote con‐

trol 24 Interior mirror 43 Interior motion sensor 32 Interior rearview mirror, com‐

pass 98 Interior temperature, setting,

air conditioner 91 Interior temperature, setting,

automatic climate con‐trol 93

Internet page 6

JJump-starting 184

KKeyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 28 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 28 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 21 Key, refer to Remote control

with integrated key 20 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐

mission 58 Knee airbag 74 Knocking control 152

LLamp and bulb replacement,

bulb replacement 175 Lamp, replacing, refer to

Lamp and bulb replace‐ment 175

Lamps 69 Lamps, automatic headlight

control 69 Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer

to Safety belts 38

Seite 216

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 217: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

LATCH child restraint fixingsystem 47

Leather care 192 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 175 License plate light, bulb re‐

placement 179 Light-alloy wheels, care 192 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 175 Lighter, socket 100 Lighting, instruments 72 Lighting, light and bulb re‐

placement 175 Lighting, vehicle, refer to

Lamps 69 Lights, parking lamps/low

beams 69 Light switch 69 Lock buttons on doors, refer

to Locking 26 Locking from the inside 26 Locking, from the outside 23 Locking, setting the confirma‐

tion signal 23 Locking the vehicle from the

inside 25 Locking the vehicle from the

outside 22 Locking without remote con‐

trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐cess 28

Longlife oils, alternative oiltypes 169

Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐proved engine oils 169

Low beams 69 Low beams, automatic 69 Low beams, bulb replace‐

ment 176 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 37 Lumbar support 37

MMain inspection, refer to Serv‐

ice requirements 66 Maintenance, refer to Service

booklet Maintenance, refer to Service

requirements 66 Maintenance require‐

ments 172 Maintenance system

MINI 172 Makeup mirror 98 Malfunction, door lock 25 Malfunction, fuel filler

flap 150 Malfunction, Steptronic trans‐

mission 59 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 67 Manual air distribution, air

conditioner 92 Manual air distribution, auto‐

matic climate control 94 Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 58 Manual operation, door

lock 25 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 150 Manual operation, selector

lever lock, Steptronic trans‐mission 59

Marking on approvedtires 161

Maximum cooling 94 Maximum speed, winter

tires 161 Microfilter 93 Microfilter, with automatic cli‐

mate control 95 MINI Homepage 6 MINI Internet page 6 MINI maintenance sys‐

tem 172 MINI Mobility System 162

Minimum tread, tires 160 Mirrors 42 Mirrors, folding in and out 43 Mirrors, interior mirror 43 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 113 Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐

phone 138 Mobility System 162 Modifications, technical, refer

to Own Safety 6 Mounting of child restraint fix‐

ing systems 46

NNeck restraints, refer to Head

restraints 41 New wheels and tires 160 Notes 6 Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐

tion 95

OOBD Onboard Diagnos‐

tics 173 OBD socket, refer to Socket

for OBD Onboard Diagno‐sis 173

Octane number, refer to Fuelquality 152

Octane rating, refer to Recom‐mended fuel grade 152

Odometer 61 Oil additives 169 Oil level 168 Oil types, alternative 169 Oil types, approved 169 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 173 Opening and closing, Comfort

Access 28 Opening and closing from the

inside 25

Seite 217

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

217Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 218: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Opening and closing from theoutside 22

Opening and closing, usingthe door lock 25

Opening and closing, via theremote control 22

Opening and unlocking fromthe inside 26

Outside air mode, automaticclimate control 94

Outside air, refer to Recircu‐lated air mode, air condi‐tioner 92

Outside air, refer to Recircu‐lated air mode, automaticclimate control 94

Overheating of engine, referto Coolant temperature 62

Own safety 6

PPark Distance Control PDC 90 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 90 Parking assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 90 Parking brake 52 Parking light, bulb replace‐

ment 177 Parking lights 69 Parking lights/low beams 69 PDC Park Distance Control 90 Personal Profile 21 Pinch protection, windows 34 Pivoting sun visor 98 Plastic, care 192 Pollen, refer to Microfilter 93 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 93 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter withautomatic climate con‐trol 95

Poor road operation 114 Power windows 33

Power windows, refer to Win‐dows 33

Prescribed engine oils, refer toApproved engine oils 169

Pressure monitoring of tires,refer to Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 79

Pressure, tires 154 Pressure warning, tires 77 Profile depth, refer to Mini‐

mum tread depth 160 Profile, tires 159 Protective function, refer to

Pinch protection system,windows 34

RRadio MINI Boost CD 124 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control withintegrated key 20

Radio ready state 50 Radio ready state, switched

off 51 Radio ready state, switched

on 50 Radio setting, refer to Radio

ready state 50 Rain sensor 55 Range 63 Rear 37 Rear fog light, bulb replace‐

ment 179 Rear lights, refer to Tail

lights 179 Rear seat backrests, foldable,

MINI Countryman 102 Rear seat backrests, foldable,

MINI Paceman 103 Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐

rors 42 Rear window defroster with

air conditioner 92

Rear window defroster withautomatic climate con‐trol 95

Rear window, washing 56 Rear window wiper 56 Recirculated air mode, air

conditioner 92 Recirculated air mode, auto‐

matic climate control 94 Recommended fuel

grade 152 Recommended tire

brands 161 Releasing, refer to Unlock‐

ing 29 Remaining range for service,

refer to Service require‐ments 66

Remaining range, refer toRange 63

Remote control 20 Remote control, battery re‐

placement 30 Remote control, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28 Remote control, Comfort Ac‐

cess, malfunctions 29 Remote control, garage door

opener 96 Remote control, radio interfer‐

ence 24 Remote control, removing

from the ignition lock 50 Remote control, service

data 172 Remote control, universal 96 Replacement remote con‐

trol 20 Replacing wheels/tires 160 Reporting safety malfunc‐

tions 9 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 62 Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐

fer to Washer fluid reser‐voir 57

Seite 218

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 219: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Restraining systems, refer toSafety belts 38

Restraint systems for chil‐dren 45

Retreaded tires 161 Reverse gear, manual trans‐

mission 57 Roadside Assistance 184 Roadside parking light, bulb

replacement 177 Roadside parking lights 70 RON recommended fuel

grade 152 RON, refer to Fuel quality 152 Rubber seals, care 192 Run-flat tires 162 Run-flat tires, flat tire 78 Run-flat tires, tire inflation

pressure 154

SSafe braking 113 Safety belts, care 193 Safety belts, damage 41 Safety belts, indicator/warning

light 41 Safety belts, rear center safety

belt 40 Safety belts, reminder 41 Safety systems, airbags 74 Safety systems, safety

belts 38 Saving fuel 120 Seat adjustment 37 Seat adjustment, manual 36 Seat belts 38 Seat heating 38 Seats 36 Seats, adjusting 36 Seats, heating 38 Seats, sitting safely 36 Selector lever lock, overrid‐

ing 59

Selector lever lock, refer to Se‐lector level positions, chang‐ing, shiftlock 58

Selector lever positions, Step‐tronic transmission 58

Selector lever, Steptronictransmission 58

Service and warranty 7 Service data in the remote

control 172 Service interval display, refer

to Condition Based ServiceCBS 172

Service interval display, referto Service requirements 66

Service requirements 66 Service requirements, CBS

Condition Based Service 172 Settings and information 63 Settings, clock 64 Settings, configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 21 Shifting, manual transmis‐

sion 57 Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐

sion 58 Shift lever, Steptronic trans‐

mission 58 Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 59 Side airbags 74 Side windows, refer to Win‐

dows 33 Sitting safely 36 Sliding/tilting sunroof, refer to

Glass sunroof, electrical 32 Slot for remote control 50 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 145 Snow chains 165 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno‐

sis 173 Special equipment, series

equipment 6 Speed, average 63 Speedometer 14

Speed, with winter tires 161 Sport button 86 Sport program, Steptronic

transmission 58 Stability control systems 84 Start/Stop button 50 Start/Stop button, starting the

engine 51 Start/Stop button, switching

off the engine 52 Starting the engine 51 Start problems, refer to Jump-

starting 184 Steering wheel 44 Steering wheel, adjusting 44 Steering wheel lock 50 Steering wheel, shift pad‐

dles 59 Steptronic transmission 57 Steptronic transmission, kick‐

down 58 Steptronic transmission, over‐

riding the selector leverlock 59

Stopping, engine 52 Storage, tires 162 Storing the vehicle 193 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 154 Summer tires, tread 159 Sun visor 98 Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Switching off, engine 52 Switching off, vehicle 52 Symbols 6

TTachometer 62 Tailgate 27 Tailgate, Comfort Access 29 Tailgate, opening/closing 27 Tailgate, opening from the

outside 27 Tail lights 179

Seite 219

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

219Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 220: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Tank gauge, refer to Fuelgauge 62

Technical changes, refer toOwn Safety 6

Telephone 138 Temperature, air condi‐

tioner 92 Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 94 Temperature, coolant, refer to

Coolant temperature 62 Temperature display, external

temperature 61 Temperature display, external

temperature warning 61 Temperature display, setting

the units 64 Temperature warning 61 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 30 Tilt alarm sensor 31 Time, setting the time 65 Tire age 160 Tire, flat tire 78 Tire identification marks 158 Tire inflation pressure 154 Tire inflation pressure, pres‐

sure loss, FTM 78 Tire pressure loss, RDC 80 Tire, pressure monitoring, re‐

fer to Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 79

Tire pressure monitor, refer toFlat Tire Monitor 77

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

system limits 82 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

system reset 80 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

warning lamp 80 Tire Quality Grading 158 Tires, breaking in 112 Tires, changing 160 Tires, condition 159 Tires, damage 160

Tire size 158 Tires, minimum tread 160 Tires, retreaded tires 161 Tires, storage 162 Tire tread 159 Towing another vehicle 186 Towing, being towed 186 Tow-starting 186 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 79 Traction control 85 Transmission lock, refer to

Changing the selector leverpositions 58

Transmission, overriding theselector lever lock with Step‐tronic transmission 59

Transmission, refer to Manualtransmission 57

Transmission, see Steptronictransmission 57

Transporting childrensafely 45

Trip-distance counter, refer toTrip odometer 61

Triple turn signal activa‐tion 53

Trip odometer 61 Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 27 Trunk, refer to Cargo area 27 Turning lights, refer to Adap‐

tive Light Control 71 Turn signal, bulb replace‐

ment 177 Turn signal indicator lamp 14 Turn signals 53 Turn signals, triple turn signal

activation 53

UUniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQG 158 Unintentional alarms, avoid‐

ing 32

Units, average fuel consump‐tion 64

Units, temperature 64 Universal remote control 96 Unlocking from the inside 26 Unlocking, from the out‐

side 22 Unlocking, tailgate 29 Unlocking, without remote

control, refer to Comfort Ac‐cess 28

Upholstery care 192 Upholstery material care 192 USB audio interface 133

VVanity mirror 98 Vehicle battery 182 Vehicle, breaking in 112 Vehicle care 191 Vehicle care, refer to

Care 190 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle paintwork, care 191 Vehicle storage 193 Vehicle, switching off 52 Vehicle wash 190 Ventilation, air condition‐

ing 95

WWarning and indicator

lamps 15 Warning and indicator lamps,

overview 194 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 67 Warning triangle 184 Washer/wiper system 54 Washer/wiper system, rain

sensor 55 Washer/wiper system, washer

fluid 56 Washer fluid 56

Seite 220

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 221: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

Washer fluid reservoir 57 Washing, vehicle 190 Welcome lights 71 Wheel change 181 Wheels and tires 154 Wheels, changing 160 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 77 Window, convenient opera‐

tion 23 Windows 33 Windows, care 191 Windows, closing 33 Windows, defrosting and de‐

fogging 92 Windows, opening 33 Windows, pinch protection 34 Windshield defroster 95 Windshield, defrosting and

defogging 92 Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 92 Windshield wash 54 Windshield washer fluid 56 Windshield wash, rear win‐

dow 56 Windshield wash, reservoir for

washer fluid 57 Windshield wash, washer

fluid 57 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 174 Windshield wiper, refer to

Washer/wiper system 54 Winter storage, care 193 Winter tires 161 Winter tires, tread 159 Wiper blades, care 191 Wiper blades, changing 174 Wiper fluid 56

YYour individual vehicle, set‐

tings, refer to Personal Pro‐file 21

Seite 221

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

221Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15

Page 222: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version
Page 223: A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI … · 2020-07-30 · able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version

01 4

0 2

964

433

ue

*BL2964433007*

DRIVE ME.Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15